EP3505015A1 - Product management display system - Google Patents
Product management display system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP3505015A1 EP3505015A1 EP19155382.5A EP19155382A EP3505015A1 EP 3505015 A1 EP3505015 A1 EP 3505015A1 EP 19155382 A EP19155382 A EP 19155382A EP 3505015 A1 EP3505015 A1 EP 3505015A1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- divider
- product
- front rail
- barrier
- cam
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 268
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 86
- 210000002105 tongue Anatomy 0.000 description 58
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 38
- 239000004606 Fillers/Extenders Substances 0.000 description 21
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000007788 roughening Methods 0.000 description 7
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 238000004873 anchoring Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 210000003811 finger Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 4
- 241000251468 Actinopterygii Species 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 235000013361 beverage Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 235000014214 soft drink Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 241001433879 Camarea Species 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Carbonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]C([O-])=O CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000012206 bottled water Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000015897 energy drink Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920005570 flexible polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000007373 indentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007769 metal material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001084 poly(chloroprene) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- -1 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000003014 reinforcing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000284 resting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000003813 thumb Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F1/00—Racks for dispensing merchandise; Containers for dispensing merchandise
- A47F1/04—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs
- A47F1/12—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs dispensing from the side of an approximately horizontal stack
- A47F1/125—Racks or containers with arrangements for dispensing articles, e.g. by means of gravity or springs dispensing from the side of an approximately horizontal stack with an article-pushing device
Definitions
- the exemplary embodiments relate generally to a shelf assembly for use in merchandising product and more particularly to a shelf assembly having improved mechanisms for displaying and pushing product on the shelves.
- known systems may include inclined trays or floors that through gravity will cause the product to move toward the front of the shelf.
- Many of these systems include floors or shelves made of a plastic material such as polypropylene that due its low coefficient of friction permit the product to easily slide along the inclined floor or surface.
- these surfaces can become obstructed with debris or sticky substances that inhibit the product from properly sliding, sometimes causing several products to tip over thus blocking additional product from moving to the front of the shelf.
- Other systems include the use of a pusher system to push the product toward the front of the shelf as the product at the front of the shelf is removed.
- the known pusher systems are typically mounted to a track and include a pusher paddle and a coiled spring to urge the product forward.
- the track becomes obstructed with dirt or sticky materials that hinder the proper operation of the pusher system in the track.
- the known pusher paddles may occasionally tip or bend backwards, thereby causing a binding of the pusher mechanism in the track. In those situations, the pusher mechanism may not properly push product toward the front of the shelf.
- One exemplary embodiment is directed at improving upon existing merchandising systems by providing a trackless pusher system that works with gravity-fed merchandise systems (i.e ., inclined shelves or trays) and non-gravity-fed merchandise systems.
- One exemplary embodiment is directed to a product management display system for merchandising product on a shelf.
- This embodiment includes using a trackless pusher mechanism that travels along a surface on which product is placed.
- the trackless system overcomes the known problems with the use of tracks to hold and guide the known pusher mechanisms. It should be understood however that the teachings of this embodiment may be used with systems that include tracks for mounting a pusher mechanism or the like.
- the pusher mechanism can include a pusher paddle and a floor that extends forward of the pusher paddle.
- a flat coiled spring or other biasing element can be operatively connected behind the pusher paddle and extend across the floor of the pusher mechanism and to the front of the shelf.
- the flat coiled spring or biasing element can extend across the divider to the front of the shelf assembly.
- An exemplary embodiment also includes the use of a pushing mechanism with the merchandising of product on horizontal or non-inclined shelves or surfaces, as well as with gravity-fed systems, or systems that use gravity as a mechanism to urge product toward the front of the shelf.
- the pusher paddle may define a concave pushing surface for pushing cylindrical products, such as soft drink bottles or cans, and to keep the paddle centered on the track and behind the product.
- the pusher paddle may define a flat pushing surface that may further include at its upper edge a curved rib or similar structure that can also be used to push cylindrical products.
- the floor of the pusher mechanism can include a notched or cut-out portion to align the pusher mechanism relative to the coiled spring.
- the floor of the system also can include a notch or cut-out portion for receiving and mounting a flat end of the coiled spring to the floor.
- a spring tip may be placed on the end of the coiled spring to mount the coiled spring to the floor of the system.
- the end of the coiled spring can mount to the divider of the assembly.
- an adaptor for a product management display system may be positioned on a floor surface of the display system.
- the adaptor may include a planar surface with at least two ribs extending outwardly from the planar surface and across the planar surface in a substantially parallel manner.
- a coiled spring may be positioned between the parallel extending ribs.
- a mounting member may be used to mount the end of the coiled spring to the floor of the system.
- the mounting member may be snap-fit to or otherwise mounted on the floor and between the glide rails.
- the trackless pusher system is retrofitted into an existing shelf assembly. This allows for the placement of the trackless pusher system in an existing shelving system as a low cost alternative to purchasing the entire trackless pusher assembly.
- the coil spring can be mounted to the retainer.
- An end of the coil spring can be directly mounted to the retainer or alternatively the end can be mounted to the retainer via an adapter.
- the adapter can have a curved portion which is received in a correspondingly shaped curved slot in the retainer to secure the end of the spring to the display assembly.
- the trays can be attached via a dovetail connection to form a shelf assembly.
- the dividers can be adjusted such that the width of the product rows can be adapted to receive different sized products.
- the product management display system can be arranged in a stackable arrangement.
- the assembly can be provided with a first tray and a second tray each having a first wall and a second wall.
- the first and second trays are each adapted to receive a pusher mechanism, and a retainer mechanism.
- First and second spacers are mounted to the first and second trays for stacking the first and second trays on top of one another.
- the first and second spacer can be provided with a plurality of detents, and the first tray and the second tray can each be provided with a plurality of correspondingly shaped sockets for receiving the plurality of detents.
- a product management display system for merchandising product on a shelf includes using a trackless pusher mechanism that travels along a surface on which product is placed and one or more dividers for separating product into rows.
- the one or more dividers may be attached and releasably engaged to a front rail. When the one or more dividers are not engaged and held in position to the front rail, the one or more dividers and product positioned on the display system may be moved in a lateral direction, or may be lifted away from the front rail. This permits ease of replanogramming of product on the shelf.
- the one or more dividers may releasably engage to the front rail through the use of corresponding teeth, resilient surfaces, a locking tab, a locking bar, a cam and/or through a friction or press fit.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail.
- the at least one divider includes a barrier and the at least one divider further includes a divider wall.
- the at least one divider also includes a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor is configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a cam coupled to the divider, wherein the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail and the cam is in the first position.
- the at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail and the cam is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail and a plurality of dividers configured to attach to the front rail and separate product into rows.
- Each of the plurality of dividers includes a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail, a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor is configured to hold product, and a cam coupled to the divider, wherein the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- Each of the plurality of dividers is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when each of the plurality of dividers is engaged with the front rail and the cam for each of the plurality of dividers is in the first position.
- each of the plurality of dividers is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when each of the plurality of dividers is engaged with the front rail and the cam for each of the plurality of dividers is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider including a barrier, a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail, a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider wall separates the divider floor into a first portion and a second portion and each of the first portion and the second portion are configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a first pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the first portion, a second pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the second portion, and a cam coupled to the at least one divider, the cam configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider is movable in a lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the first position, and the at least one divider resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider including a barrier configured to engage the front rail, a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to front rail, a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor configured to hold product.
- the display system also can include a resilient tab coupled to the divider, the resilient tab configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider is fixed in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the resilient tab is in the first position.
- the at least one divider is movable in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the resilient tab is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail, the front rail comprising at least one first projection and at least one first recess, and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising at least one second recess and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the divider configured to move between a first position and a second position,
- the at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one second recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the divider is in the first position.
- the at least one divider (a) resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) is secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one second recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the divider is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system in an example, includes a front rail, the front rail including at least one first projection and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the front rail configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the merchandise display system also includes at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising at least one recess.
- the at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the front rail is in the first position.
- the at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the front rail is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system in an example, includes a front rail, the front rail comprising a first projection and a second projection.
- the merchandise display system also includes at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising a recess and a third projection.
- the at least one of the second projection or the third projection is a movable projection that is movable between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first projection of the front rail is engaged with the recess of the divider and the movable projection is in the first position.
- the at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first projection of the front rail is engaged with the recess of the divider and the movable projection is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system in an example, includes a front rail, the front rail comprising at least a first engaging member.
- the merchandise display system also includes at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising at least a second engaging member.
- the merchandise display system also includes a third engaging member configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first engaging member of the front rail is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider and the third engaging member is in the first position.
- the at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first engaging member of the front rail is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider and the third engaging member is in the second position.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail, the at least one divider including a barrier, the at least one divider further including a divider wall, the at least one divider further including a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor is configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a cam coupled to the divider, wherein the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider can be secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail.
- the cam can inhibit movement of the at least one divider in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam in in the first position and the cam can allow movement of the divider in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam is in the second position.
- the merchandise display system can include a handle to rotate the cam between the first position and the second position.
- the merchandise display system can include a handle to slide the cam between the first position and the second position.
- a merchandise display system in another exemplary embodiment, includes a front rail defining a rail groove and a divider configured to engage the front rail.
- the divider includes a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor extending perpendicular to the divider wall.
- the divider floor further includes a top surface to hold product and a bottom surface.
- the merchandise display system also includes a cam rotatably coupled to the divider.
- the cam is configured to rotate between a first position and a second position.
- the cam defines a cam glide that extends beneath the bottom surface of the divider floor and contacts the front rail when the cam is in the first position.
- the divider is movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam is in the first position and the cam glide contacts the front rail, and the divider is fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam is in the second position and in contact with the rail groove of the front rail.
- the cam is at all times in contact with the front rail, regardless of whether the cam is in the first position or the second position, or in a position in-between the first and second positions.
- the cam includes a handle to rotate the cam between the first position and the second position, and the cam can include one or more cam surfaces configured to engage one or more groove walls in the rail groove when the cam is in the second position.
- the cam glide may define an elongated planar surface.
- the merchandise display system may include a pusher mechanism having a pusher surface and a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface.
- a coiled spring having a coiled end may be positioned behind the pusher surface and a free end of the spring may attach the pusher mechanism to the merchandise display system.
- the barrier may be configured to receive the free end of the coiled spring.
- the front rail may define a ridge configured to engage a groove in the divider.
- a merchandise display system in another exemplary embodiment, includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail.
- the at least one divider may include a barrier and a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail.
- the divider may include a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall and the divider wall separates the divider floor into a first portion and a second portion and each of the first portion and the second portion are configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system includes a first pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the first portion and a second pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the second portion.
- the merchandise display system includes a cam coupled to the at least one divider.
- the cam defines a cam glide and is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider is movable in a lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the first position and the cam glide is in contact with the front rail, and the at least one divider resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the second position and the cam glide is not in contact with the front rail.
- the first and second pusher mechanisms each include a pusher surface, a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface, and a coiled spring having a coiled end and a free end.
- the coiled end is positioned behind the pusher surface and the free end attaches the first and second pusher mechanisms to the merchandise display system.
- the at least one divider may define a divider engaging member and the at least one front rail may define a front rail engaging member.
- the divider engaging member is configured to engage the front rail engaging member.
- the divider engaging member may define divider teeth on at least one surface of the divider engaging member.
- the front rail engaging member may define front rail teeth on at least one surface of the front rail engaging member.
- the divider teeth are configured to engage the front rail teeth.
- a merchandise display system in another exemplary embodiment, includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail.
- the at least one divider includes a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall.
- the divider floor is configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a cam coupled to the divider.
- the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the cam defines a cam glide for lifting the divider up off of the front rail when the cam is in the first position.
- the at least one divider is secured to the front rail when the cam is in the second position and the cam glide is moved away from the front rail.
- the at least one divider is movable in the plane of a shelf only in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and the at least one divider is fixed in the plane of the shelf in all directions other than the direction parallel to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail.
- the cam may include a handle to rotate the cam between the first position and the second position.
- the cam glide may define an elongated planar surface having an edge that permits slidable movement of the cam glide relative to the front rail.
- the merchandise display system may include a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail.
- the divider may include a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall configured to hold product.
- a front lock may be coupled to the divider.
- the front lock may be configured to rotate, pivot or move between a first position and a second position. When in the first position, the front lock may permit slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail. In an alternative aspect, the front lock may lift the divider up off of the front rail. When in the second position, the front lock locks the divider to the front rail and prevents slidable movement between the divider and the front rail.
- the merchandise display system may include a divider secured to a support structure.
- the divider may include a divider wall and a divider floor.
- the divider wall may extend upwardly from the divider floor and the divider floor may include a top surface.
- the system may further include a barrier that is moveable by rotation between a folded position and an upright position without a rotation biasing element.
- a product positioned on a top surface of the divider floor can contact the barrier when the product moves toward the forward end of the divider and rotate the barrier from the folded position to the upright position.
- the barrier may be configured to cease the forward movement of the product when the barrier is in the upright position.
- the system may include a rotational mounting structure to which the moveable barrier is connected. The rotational mounting structure may be removably connected to the forward end of the divider.
- the merchandise display system may be used in conjunction with a product tray for restocking of the system with product.
- the product tray may include a bottom surface, right side wall, left side wall, and an alignment flap.
- the alignment flap may include a proximate end, distal end, right edge, and left edge.
- a flap width of the alignment flap may be defined in between the right edge and the left edge.
- the proximate end of the alignment flap may be connected to the bottom surface of the product tray and the alignment flap may be configured such that a least a portion of the flap width is about equal to a width of product stored in the product tray.
- the alignment flap may be positioned in between opposing divider walls of a merchandise display system in which a product pocket is defined in between the opposing divider walls. The alignment flap aligns the product tray and the product stored in the product tray with the product pocket so that the product stored in the product tray can be slid from in the product tray into the product pocket of the merchandise display system.
- Exemplary merchandise system 10 includes a product dispensing tray 12 in which is mounted an exemplary trackless pusher mechanism 14.
- the pusher mechanism 14 will fit in the tray 12 and will slide along the surface of the tray without the use of tracks, rails, or guides typically used to hold a conventional pusher mechanism to the tray or floor of the tray.
- the pusher mechanism defines a pusher paddle and a pusher floor that extends forward of the pusher paddle.
- a coiled spring may extend across the pusher floor and operatively connect to the tray at a forward position on the tray.
- product to be merchandised may be placed in the tray in front of the pusher paddle and may sit on the pusher floor as well as the coiled spring. With this configuration, the weight of the product will prevent the pusher paddle from tipping to ensure proper pushing of the product. In addition, the problems associated with debris or sticky materials hindering the effectiveness of known pusher systems that use tracks, rails or guides have been eliminated. Other aspects, embodiments and features of the invention and its teachings are set forth in more detail below.
- the exemplary tray 12 may define a surface 16 and one or more dividing panels or dividers 18 to separate the tray into numerous rows for placement of product.
- the tray 12 may be a shelf or any other surface on which products may be placed for merchandising.
- the surface 16 may be a solid surface or a surface defining a plurality of spaced-apart apertures 20 separated by a plurality of support ribs 22.
- the apertures 20 and ribs 22 provide a surface that permits the slidable movement of product placed on this surface and also permits liquids and dirt to pass through the apertures 20 so that they do not collect on the surface 16.
- the surface 16 may be made of any suitable material that permits the slidable movement of product on the surface 16. Other surface or floor configurations are known and may be used with the principles of the invention.
- the surface 16 may define a rounded end portion 24 that includes a notch or cut-out portion 26.
- the end portion 24 may be rounded to match the shape of the product that is placed on the tray.
- the depicted end portion 24 is rounded or defines a semi-circular shape to match the contour of a bottle or can that may be placed in the tray and on the end portion 24.
- Other shapes of the end portion may be used with the invention depending on the product to be merchandised.
- the notch 26 may be used to receive and mount an end 29 of a coiled spring 30 or similar biasing element.
- the notch 26 may define opposing angled edge surfaces 32 that are joined by edge 34.
- the edge 34 is preferably centered across the width of the product row formed in the tray 12 and extends perpendicular to the length of the tray. This configuration will center the coiled spring 30 relative to the tray 12 and will permit the spring to extend in a substantially parallel manner relative to the length of the tray. In other words, the depicted edge 34 of the notch 26 will permit the spring 30 to extend along the length of the tray 12 at or near the center of the product row formed by the tray.
- the location and configuration of the notch may vary depending on the desired placement of the spring.
- the coiled spring 30 may define an end 29 that is configured to be placed across the notch 26 and onto the edge 34.
- the end 29 of the coiled spring may be V-shaped and function as a hook such that the end 29 will wrap around the edge 34 with a portion of the end 29 of the coiled spring extending beneath the end portion 24 of the surface 16. This configuration permits an easy installation of the coiled spring onto the tray.
- a spring tip 60 may be added to the end 29 of the spring 30 to assist with the mounting of the spring to the system.
- the spring tip 60 may define numerous shapes and configurations depending on the configuration of the tray and the surface on which the spring end needs to attach.
- the spring tip 60 may be permanently attached to the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 or it may be detachable to permit the interchange or replacement of the spring tip 60.
- the spring tip 60 may be made of plastic and may define one or more apertures.
- Aperture 61 may be used to receive the end 29 of the coiled spring 30.
- a second aperture 63 may be used to receive a mating tongue or mounting member 65 extending from the surface 16 of the tray 12, as discussed below. With this configuration, the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 may be operatively connected to the tray 12.
- the end 29 of the coiled spring may snap-fit into an aperture formed in the surface 16, or may be otherwise inserted and secured to an aperture or opening in the tray, thereby securing the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 in position.
- dividers 18 may also be used to separate product into rows.
- the dividers 18 extend substantially upwardly from the surface 16 and as illustrated in Figure 1 , may be positioned on opposing sides of the surface 16. Alternatively, the dividers 18 may be positioned at any desired position on the tray 12 or to the surface 16.
- the dividers 18 may be formed as a unitary structure with the surface 16, or the dividers 18 may be detachable to provide added flexibility with the system.
- the dividers may be attached to a front or back rail depending on the system.
- the dividers 18 may define numerous configurations and may extend upwardly any desired distance to provide the desired height of the dividers between the rows of product to be merchandised. This height may be adjustable by adding divider extenders or the like.
- the product-retaining members 44 serve as a front retaining wall or bar to hold the product in the tray 12 and to prevent the product from falling out of the tray 12. These members are also configured to permit the easy removal of the forward-most product positioned in the tray 12.
- the product-retaining member 44 may be one or more curve-shaped retaining ribs as depicted in Figure 1 . These illustrated retaining ribs may extend from one divider to another divider thereby joining the dividers. The retaining ribs may also extend part-way between the dividers, as also shown in Figure 1 as rib 46, to also assist in retaining the product in the tray.
- the product-retaining member 44 may be a curve-shaped solid retaining wall 48 that extends between dividers.
- the retaining wall 48 may be transparent or semi-transparent to permit visualization of the product on the shelf.
- the retaining wall 48 may also extend part-way between the dividers 18.
- the retaining wall 100 may be attached to the surface of the tray and not connect to the dividers.
- the retaining wall 100 may form an opening 102 defined by an upper member 104, opposing, curved side walls 106 that further define an angled edge 108, and a floor member 110.
- the side walls 106 may also be straight and not curved depending on the system.
- the end of the coiled spring may also snap-fit into the floor 110 or otherwise attached to the tray using any of the techniques described herein.
- One of skill in the art will readily appreciate that there are numerous shapes and configurations possible for the product-retaining member 44 and that the depicted configurations are merely exemplary embodiments of these numerous configurations.
- the exemplary trackless pusher mechanism 14 defines a pusher paddle 50 and a pusher floor 52.
- the pusher paddle 50 and pusher floor 52 may be formed as a single, unitary structure or may be separate structures that are joined together using known techniques.
- the pusher paddle 50 and pusher floor 52 may be made of any known suitable plastic or metal material.
- the pusher paddle and pusher floor may be reinforced using any known reinforcing techniques.
- the pusher paddle 50 forms a curved-shape pusher surface or face 54 that is configured to match the shape of the product to be merchandised, such as plastic bottles or cans containing a beverage, as depicted in Figures 3-5 .
- the curve-shaped pusher surface 54 permits the pusher to remain centrally aligned with the last product in the tray. This configuration reduces friction and drag between the pusher and the divider walls.
- the pusher surface or face may be a flat surface.
- the flat pusher surface may be accompanied by a curved shaped rib that is positioned near or on the top of the pusher paddle and that may be used to center and align product in the tray, in a manner similar to the curve-shaped pusher surface 54 depicted in Figure 1 .
- the curve shaped rib may define other shapes and configurations that permit cylindrical or similar shaped products to be properly pushed in the tray. Advertisement, product identification or other product information may be placed on the pusher surface 54.
- a support member 58 Positioned behind the pusher surface or face 54 may be one or more support members 58, such as ribs, walls, or gussets.
- the support members 58 are configured to support the pusher surface 54 and further connect the pusher paddle 50 to the pusher floor 52.
- the coiled spring 30 positioned between the support members 58 is the coiled spring 30, and more specifically the coiled end 57 that is used to urge the pusher paddle 50 forward and along the tray 12, as understood in the art. Any technique used to operatively connect the coiled spring to the pusher paddle 50 may be used with the invention.
- the pusher floor 52 may be positioned below the pusher paddle 50 and may extend forward of the pusher surface 54 of the pusher paddle.
- the pusher floor 52 may extend any predetermined distance and at any predetermined angle.
- the pusher floor 52 may extend substantially perpendicular to the pusher surface 54.
- the pusher floor 52 may extend a sufficient distance to permit one product, such as a single bottle or can, to be placed on the pusher floor.
- the pusher floor 52 may be configured to permit more than one product to be placed on the pusher floor.
- the pusher floor 52 may define any shape, including the depicted round shape and may define any product retaining features on the surface of the pusher floor, such as ribs, walls, or the like, to further hold the product on the pusher floor.
- the pusher floor 52 may define an elongated channel, groove or recessed portion 59 that is sized, shaped and configured to seat the coiled spring 30.
- the channel or groove 59 may extend across the floor 52 and in a substantially perpendicular manner relative to the pusher paddle 50.
- the groove or channel may extend part-way or across the entire pusher floor 52, as shown in Figure 19 . Such configuration permits the proper alignment and positioning of the pusher paddle 50 in the tray.
- the groove 59 may define a depth that matches or exceeds the thickness of the coiled spring 30.
- the coiled spring 30 will seat at or below the pusher floor surface such that product will not sit directly on the coiled spring, rather, such product will sit on the pusher floor surface.
- the pusher floor may include apertures and openings through which debris or other items may pass.
- the floor may be a solid surface.
- an adaptor 180 may be positioned on the surface 16.
- the adaptor 180 may include one or more raised ribs 182 on which a product may sit.
- the raised ribs 182 may extend longitudinally along the length of the adaptor 180.
- the adaptor 180 may be a flat extrusion of plastic material (or any other suitable material) defining a planar surface 184 with the one or more ribs 182 extending outwardly from the planar surface 184.
- the adaptor 180 may define a rounded end 185 and include a notch or cut-away portion 186 through which or across which the coiled spring may extend.
- the rounded end 185 may be configured to match the shape of the product that is placed on the tray. Other shapes of the end 185, notch 186 and adaptor 180 may be used with the invention depending on the product to be merchandised.
- the adaptor 180 may be a separate, insertable piece or, alternatively, a piece formed integral with the surface 16.
- the adaptor 180 may be easily insertable onto the surface 16 and between the dividers 18.
- the pusher mechanism 14 may be positioned on top of the adaptor 180 and may slide freely across the ribs 182 of the adaptor 180.
- the coiled spring 30 may extend in a parallel manner between the ribs 182 and may seat at or below the top surface of the ribs 182, as more clearly shown in Figure 20 . With this configuration, the product to be merchandised may sit on, and slide along, the ribs 182 and not on the coiled spring 30.
- the ribs 182 may be a raised bead or raised beads, or a series of fingers that may be used to facilitate the movement of the product on the surface 16.
- the ribs 182 may be product moving members, such as runners or one or more rollers or rolling members that permit the product to roll across the rolling members and toward the front of the product display system.
- Exemplary roller assemblies include those disclosed and described in United States Application Serial No. 11/257,718 filed October 25, 2005 and assigned to RTC Industries, Inc, which application is incorporated herein by reference. As should be appreciated by those skilled in the art, there are many possible techniques that may be used with the described pusher mechanisms for facilitating the movement of the product on the shelf or floor.
- the underneath side of the pusher floor 52 may be a smooth planar surface that will slide freely along the surface 16.
- the pusher floor 52 may include beads, runners, rollers or the like that will permit the pusher floor to slide along the surface yet raise the pusher floor up off of the surface 16.
- the underneath side of the pusher floor may be configured with rail mounting members to permit the mounting of the pusher to a track or rail, as understood in the art.
- the pusher floor further defines a notch or cut-out portion 62 through which will pass the coiled spring 30.
- the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 will pass through the notch 62 and through the notch 26 of the surface 16 and will mount to the tray using any of the techniques described above.
- the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 will be held in position as described above and the coiled end 57 of the spring 30 will begin to uncoil behind the pusher paddle 50. If the pusher 14 is allowed to move forward in the tray 14, such as when product is removed from the front of the tray, the coiled end 57 of the spring 30 will coil and force the pusher paddle 50 forward in the tray 12, thereby urging product toward the front of the tray.
- the coiled spring 30 may extend below and underneath the pusher floor 52 as opposed to above and across the pusher floor, as depicted in the Figures. With this configuration, the groove 59 and notch 62 may not be necessary.
- the coiled spring 30 may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring commonly used with pusher systems.
- the present invention may use one or more coiled springs to urge the pusher mechanism 14 forward depending on the desired application.
- the coil tension of the spring 30 may also vary depending on the particular application.
- the trackless pusher mechanism 14 is shown mounted to the tray 12. As illustrated, the pusher mechanism 14 fits in the tray 12 between the dividers 18. End 29 of the coiled spring 30 extends through the notch in the pusher floor and mounts to the tray as described above. In use, the pusher mechanism 14 will slide along the surface 16 of the tray 12 without the use of tracks, rails, or guides. As depicted in Figure 2 , the pusher mechanism 14 is shown in a forward position.
- the pusher mechanism 14 is shown merchandising one product 70 in the merchandise system 10.
- the product is prevented from tipping out of the tray by the product-retaining member 44.
- the product 70 may be any product to be merchandised including the depicted soft drink bottle.
- the product 70 sits on the pusher floor 52 and the coiled spring 30 that extends below the product. The weight of the product on the floor 52 and the positioning of the product across the spring 30 prevent the paddle 50 from tipping in the tray 12.
- the pusher mechanism 14 is shown merchandising multiple products 70 in the merchandise system 10.
- the product next to the pusher paddle 50 sits on the pusher floor 52 and the coiled spring 30 that extends below the product.
- the other products will sit on the coiled spring 30 that will extend below these products.
- the adaptor 180 may be positioned in the system in which case the product may sit on the ribs 182 of the adaptor as opposed to the coiled spring. Again, the weight of the product on the pusher floor 52 and the positioning of the products across the spring 30 prevent the paddle 50 from tipping in the tray.
- the pusher mechanism 14 In use, as one product is removed from the front of the tray near the product-retaining member 44, the pusher mechanism 14 (through the urging of the coiled spring 30) will push the remaining product forward in the tray 12 until the forward-most product contacts the product-retaining member 44. As additional products are removed, the pusher mechanism 14 will continue to push the remaining product toward the product-retaining member 44.
- a rear view of the pusher mechanism 14 shows the pusher mechanism 14 merchandising multiple products 70 in the merchandise system 10.
- the product next to the pusher paddle 50 sits on the pusher floor 52 and the coiled spring 30 that extends below the product.
- the other products will sit on the coiled spring that will extend below these products.
- the adaptor 180 may be positioned in the system in which case the product may sit on the ribs 182 of the adaptor as opposed to the coiled spring.
- the coiled end 57 of the spring 30 will urge the pusher paddle 50 of the pusher mechanism 14 forward in the tray 12 until the forward-most product contacts the product-retaining member 44.
- the coiled end 57 may be positioned between two support members 58. The support members will retain the coiled spring between these members.
- the pusher floor 52 may also extend below the support members 58.
- multiple trays 12 may be formed into a single multi-tray assembly 80.
- the multi-trays may have a common floor with dividers 18 extending upwardly from the floor to create the multiple trays or rows.
- the product-retaining member 44 may be a solid member that extends between two dividers, as discussed above.
- One or more of the multi-tray assemblies 80 may be coupled or joined together in a side-by-side manner using any known technique, including clips, dovetailing, fasteners, or the like. With this configuration, numerous rows of product can be provided for the merchandising of numerous products.
- the trackless pusher mechanism 14 may be used with gravity-fed systems, that is, systems having trays or product channels that are mounted on an incline to permit gravity to assist with the merchandising of the product.
- the trackless pusher mechanism 14 may be used with systems that are mounted in a non-inclined or in a horizontal manner where gravity will provide little or no assistance with the merchandising of the product.
- the trackless pusher mechanism 14 may also be used to push various shaped products.
- Figure 7 depicts an exemplary tip 60 for the end 29 of a coiled spring 30 that may be used with the merchandise system 10.
- the tip 60 defines an aperture 61 for receiving the end 29 of the coiled spring and an aperture 63 for mounting to the surface 16 of the tray.
- extending beneath the surface 16 may be a tongue or mounting member 65 that may be configured to mate with the aperture 63 and to snap-fit the tip 60 onto the tongue 65 and thus to the surface 16.
- the exemplary tip 60 of Figure 7 is shown being mounted to the tongue or mounting member 65.
- the tongue 65 may include an elongated outwardly extending rib 67 that is used to snap-fit the tip 60 onto the tongue 65.
- rib 67 that is used to snap-fit the tip 60 onto the tongue 65.
- the exemplary tip 60 is shown fully mounted in a snap-fit manner to the surface 16, and more specifically to the end portion 24 of the surface 16 of the tray 12. Also depicted is the mounting of the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 to the aperture 61 of the tip 60. As shown in Figure 9 , the end 29 of the coiled spring may be inserted into the aperture 61. The aperture 61 is configured to receive the end 29 of the coiled spring and hold the end 29 in position, and to also permit the removal of the end 29 of the coiled spring from the aperture 61 in those circumstances where it is desirable to disconnect the coiled spring from the tip to permit the removal of the pusher mechanism 14 from the system.
- a mounting member 130 may be used to mount the end 29 of the coiled spring to the floor 131 of the system.
- the mounting member 130 may be snap-fit to or otherwise mounted on the floor 131 and between the glide rails 132. The mounting member will thus hold the end of the coiled spring in position and to the floor of the system.
- the mounting member 130 may include one or more legs 136 on one or more sides of the member 130.
- the legs may be configured to snap-fit to the underside of the rails 132 to thereby hold the mounting member 130 to the floor of the system.
- the legs 136 may include legs ends 137 defining an L-shape or angled surfaces that are configured to contact the underside of the rail 132 and prevent the mounting member 130 from being lifted up from the floor, except by the intentional flexing of the legs out from the underside of the rail 132.
- the legs 136 may contact the connecting ribs 134 which will prevent slidable movement of the mounting member 130 relative to the floor.
- the mounting member 130 is shown being mounted to the floor of the system and more specifically to the rails.
- Figure 27 illustrates that the mounting member 130 remains in position as the pusher paddle 141 is pulled away from the front of the system.
- the mounting member 130 may be connected to this type of system floor 131 using other techniques. For example, a separate mounting clip, one or more fasteners, adhesives, or other techniques may be used to secure the mounting member 130 to the floor 131.
- the mounting member 130 may also include an aperture or opening or slot 138 that will receive the end 29 of the spring.
- the spring may be mounted using any of the techniques described herein, or other techniques. The configuration of the aperture 138 and mounting member 130 will hold the spring in position on the mounting member 130, similar to the technique described above.
- the mounting member 130 may also include glide ribs 139 on a top surface that allow product placed thereon to slide more easily across the mounting member after the mounting member is installed to the floor of the system.
- the mounting member 130 may also include an elongated flat body 140 that extends forward of the location of the legs 136 to provide stability to the mounting member 130 after it is mounted to the floor of the system.
- the pusher paddle or pusher mechanism 141 may include a pusher face 143 configured to match the shape of the product against which it pushes. As illustrated, the pusher face 143 may be curve shaped to match the shape of a bottle or other cylindrical object.
- the pusher paddle 141 may also include a pusher floor 145 similar to the pusher floor configurations described above.
- the pusher floor 145 may further include a spring sleeve 147 that receives the coiled spring 30 to shield and protect the spring.
- the spring sleeve 147 may extend partly or fully across the pusher floor 145 and in the direction of the spring 30.
- the spring sleeve 147 may have a relatively short height and a flat surface 149 to permit product to sit thereon without significant tipping or leaning of the product.
- the pusher paddle 141 may be positioned on top of the floor 131 to glide on top of the surface, as described above.
- the pusher paddle may be positioned between two product divider walls 153 that are joined together by a product retaining member 155. Additional product retaining members 157 may extend outwardly from the product dividers.
- FIG. 28 and 29 there is shown yet another alternative technique for mounting the end 29 of the coiled spring 30 to the merchandise display system.
- the end 29 is riveted to the tray 216.
- the trackless pusher system may be retrofitted to an existing shelf assembly 230, which may have product dividers already built in.
- the trackless pusher system may be retrofitted to an existing wire shelf assembly.
- a tray or adaptor 216 may have a glide floor 222 that may be sized to a single lane of the shelf 234 or sized to an entire shelf width.
- the glide floor 222 may include several raised ribs 224, which help to reduce friction for the products merchandised on the tray 216. It should be understood that one or more raised ribs 224 may be used with the glide floor 222.
- the glide floor 222 may be a flat, planar surface without raised ribs.
- the tray or adaptor 216 may be configured similar to the adaptor 180 of Figure 16 .
- the end 29 of coiled spring 30 may be riveted, via a rivet 229, to the front end 228 of the tray 216, or may be attached by any other attachment technique.
- the tray 216 can be retained to the shelf by any attachment technique suitable for the particular shelf.
- the tray 216 may include one or more outwardly extending fingers or snaps 220, which may engage one or more individual wires 232 of the shelf 234 to retain the tray 216 on the shelf 234.
- the fingers or snaps 220 may extend longitudinally along the length of the tray 216, or may be spaced apart along the length of the tray.
- the snaps 220 may be used to snap-fit the tray 216 to the existing wire shelf.
- the snaps 220A and 220B may define numerous configurations that permit the tray 216 to be snap fit to the shelf.
- the embodiment depicted in Figures 28-32 allows for the placement of the trackless pusher system in an existing shelving system, such as a wire shelf system, as a low cost alternative to the entire trackless pusher assembly. It should be understood that with this embodiment, any pusher mechanism described herein may be used.
- the display management system comprises one or more pusher mechanisms 286, one or more dividers 266, one or more trays 306, and one or more retainers 250.
- the pusher mechanisms 286 can be formed of a pusher paddle 287 and a pusher floor 288. Product is placed on the pusher floor 288 and guided to the front of the display management system via the dividers 266 and the pusher paddle 287.
- the coiled spring 30 biases the pusher mechanism 286 toward the retainer 250 such that product moves to the front of the system.
- the coiled spring 30 can be mounted to the retainer 250.
- the coiled spring 30 can be mounted to a divider 266 (also shown in Figures 48 and 49 ).
- the coiled spring 30 can be directly mounted to the retainer 250, as depicted in Figure 33 , or can be mounted to the retainer 250 via a separate adapter 252, as depicted in Figure 34 .
- the adapter 252 has a wall 254 proximate a first end 256.
- the first end 256 has a curved portion 262, which curves upwardly.
- the middle portion of the adapter 252 may be provided with a curved slot 260, which is adapted to receive a correspondingly shaped spring end (not shown).
- the coiled spring 30 at one end can be secured to the middle portion of the adapter 252.
- the curved slot 260 corresponds in shape and size of the first spring end.
- the first spring end of the coiled spring 30 can be crimped or bent to provide for additional fastening. Nevertheless, any sufficient fastening method can be used to fix the first spring end of the coiled spring 30 to the adapter 252.
- the retainer 250 has a curved slot 284 corresponding in shape and size to the curved portion 262 of the adapter 252.
- the curved slot 284 extends the length of the retainer to allow for unlimited positioning of the adapter 252 along the length of the retainer 250.
- the curved portion 262 of the adapter 252 is placed into the curved slot 284 of the retainer 250.
- the curved slot 284 secures the adapter 252 and the first spring end of the coiled spring 30 to the retainer 250 and provides for a quick and easy assembly of the display system.
- the wall 254 provides additional stability in the connection between the retainer 250 and the adapter 252. Other methods, however, can be used to secure the adapter 252 and/or the first spring end of the coiled spring 30 to the retainer 250.
- the coiled spring 30 of the pusher paddle 287 can be mounted directly to the front of the tray 306.
- the first spring end 290 of the coiled spring 30 is provided with a curved portion.
- the curved portion curves downwardly from the pusher floor 288 and is adapted to be received in a recess 316 (shown in Figure 33 ) defined by a lip 318 of the front surface of the dispensing tray 306 and the retainer 250.
- a vertically oriented surface of the retainer 250 and the lip 318 are spaced such that a gap is formed between the vertically oriented surface and a front edge of the lip 250.
- the first spring end 290 is inserted into the gap formed between the vertically oriented surface of the retainer 250 and the front edge of the lip 318 and placed into the recess 316 formed by the lip 318 of the dispensing tray 306 and the retainer 250.
- the coiled spring 30 can be directly mounted to a divider 266.
- the coiled spring 30 can be mounted perpendicular to the pusher floor 288 such that the axis, about which the coiled spring 30 is coiled, is perpendicular to the pusher floor 288. This orientation has the benefit of preventing the pusher paddle from tipping back.
- the first spring end 290 can be provided with an angled portion 292 and a tip portion 296.
- the angled portion 292 can be bent perpendicular to the coiled spring body 294.
- the divider can be provided with a slot 298, which is adapted to receive the tip portion 296 of the first spring end 290.
- the tip portion 296 is inserted into the slot 298. Once the tip portion 296 is fully inserted into the slot 298, the angled portion 292 engages the slot 298 so as to secure the first spring end 290 to the divider 266.
- the pusher paddle 287 can be formed flat to accommodate correspondingly shaped product.
- the pusher paddle 286 can have a curved first end and a flat second end. This serves to accommodate a variety of cylindrical products having a variety of different sized diameters and to facilitate the operation of the pusher mechanism 286.
- the product in the pusher mechanism 286 and the curved first end together force the pusher mechanism against the divider 266, such that the coil spring 30 remains flat against the divider 266 holding the first spring end 290, while in tension or in operation. This allows for a smoother operation of the pusher mechanism and ensures that the product is properly dispensed as users remove the product from the system.
- the distance between the dividers 266 can be adjusted to accommodate different sized containers.
- the dividers 266 can be provided with connecting portions 272.
- the connecting portions 272 can be provided with a first elongated angled surface 268 and a second elongated angled surface 270. Additionally, the connecting portions 272 can be provided with a plurality of projections 274.
- the rails can be formed of teeth 278 having face surfaces 280 and flank surfaces 282.
- the connecting portions 272 When assembled, as depicted in Figure 41C , the connecting portions 272 are received between the teeth 278 of the rails. Additionally, the elongated angled surfaces 268 and 270 and the projections 274 are wedged between the teeth 278. Also as shown in Figure 41C , the elongated angled surfaces 268 and 270 engage the face surfaces 280, and the projections 274 engage the lower surfaces of the teeth 278. Flank surfaces 282 contact the connecting portion 272.
- the trays 306 are provided with dovetail connections.
- a first side 308 of the trays 306 is provided with tongues 312 adapted to fit within grooves 314 located on a second side 310 of the trays 306.
- the grooves 314 are aligned with tongues 312 such that the tongues 312 are firmly secured within the grooves 314.
- the trays 306 are configured to receive the retainer 250 at a front end.
- the retainer can be provided with rectangular holes 300, and the retainer is provided with correspondingly shaped and sized projections 302. To secure the retainer 250 to the tray 306, the projections 302 fit into holes 300 to lock the retainer into place on the tray 306.
- the product management display system 400 can be arranged such that trays 402, 404 can be stacked on top of one another.
- This embodiment can consist generally of a first tray 402, a second tray 404, a first spacer 406, and a second spacer 408.
- the trays 402, 404 are each arranged to house product to be dispensed.
- the first tray 402 and the second tray 404 can be each provided with a clear retainer 410, a pusher mechanism 412, first and second guiding walls, and a coil spring 414.
- the pusher mechanism 414 is arranged in a similar fashion as the embodiments discussed above, such that it slides product along the surface of the trays 402, 404, while product is removed. Additionally, any of the alternative arrangements of the pusher mechanism discussed above may be implemented in a stackable tray arrangement.
- the stackable product management display system can be provided with a dovetail connection or any other suitable connection, such as a snap-fit connection, screw-thread connection, or a rivet connection.
- the first and second trays are provided with detents 416 for assembling the first and second spacers 406, 408 to the first and second trays 402, 404.
- Each of the first and second trays 402, 404 can be provided with sockets 418 on their respective outside surfaces for receiving the correspondingly shaped detents 416 located on the first and second spacers 406, 408.
- the detents 416 located on the first and second spacers 406, 408 are placed into the correspondingly shaped sockets 418 on the outside surfaces of the first and second trays 402, 404 in a locking arrangement. This provides for a stackable arrangement that can be implemented in conjunction with any of the embodiments discussed above.
- a pusher paddle 500 may be mounted directly to a shelf 508 and held to the shelf by the end of the coiled spring 504. The pusher paddle 500 will slide along and on top of the surface of the shelf.
- One or more dividers 502 that define a T-shaped configuration may be positioned next to the pusher paddle 500.
- the base of the divider 502 may be positioned on the shelf such that the base is located underneath the pusher paddle 500. With this configuration, the pusher paddle 500 may slide along the base of the divider. If the dividers 502 are positioned sufficiently far away from the paddle 500, the paddle 500 will slide directly on the surface of the shelf 508.
- the dividers 502 may define numerous configurations including those described herein and may be secured to the shelf using any known technique, including push pins, rivets, fasteners, adhesives and the like.
- the end 510 of the coiled spring 504 is positioned within a hole or aperture 506 located on the shelf 508.
- the end 510 may define a spring tip that may further define any suitable configuration that permits the spring end to pass into the hole 506 and remain secured to the hole.
- the spring tip of end 510 may define a hook-shaped configuration that permits the end 510 to wrap around the edges of the hole 506.
- the spring tip may define one or more catches that hook onto the edges of the hole 506. Still other spring tip configurations are possible.
- a fastener 512 may be used to further secure the spring 504 to the shelf 508 .
- This fastener 512 will provide a second spaced-apart anchoring point for the spring that will hold the spring in the desired alignment during the full operation of the spring 504 as the paddle 500 moves back and forth on the shelf 508. It will be appreciated that depending on the shelf type and the number and spacing of existing holes on the shelf, even more anchoring points are possible.
- FIG. 55 there is depicted an exemplary mounting technique for mounting the spring 504 of the paddle 500 onto a shelf.
- the end 510 of the spring 504 is inserted into the hole 506 on the shelf.
- the end 510 may define a spring tip as described herein to hold the end 510 to the edges of the hole 506.
- the spring 504 which in this embodiment includes a rivet or stud 514, is lowered onto the shelf such that the rivet or stud 514 fits within another hole 506 located on the shelf. This rivet or stud provides another anchoring point for the spring.
- the spring 504 may define an aperture 516 for receiving yet another rivet or stud 518 to even further secure the spring 504 to the shelf.
- the spring 504 will be secured to the shelf, and thus the paddle will be secured to the shelf.
- the spring will retain the desired alignment during the full operation of the spring as the paddle moves back and forth on the shelf. It should be understood that other anchoring techniques are possible to secure the end of the spring 504 to the shelf, including any of the technique described herein, or any combination of the techniques described herein. It should be appreciated that if a shelf does not have pre-existing holes that could be used to anchor the spring 504, one or more holes could be drilled into the shelf at the desired locations.
- a trackless pusher paddle may be retrofitted directly onto existing store shelves with very minimal effort or extra mounting pieces. Additionally, this embodiment is easily removable to permit the repositioning of the pusher paddle at any location on the shelf to accommodate any size and type of product being merchandised on the shelf.
- any of the pusher paddles described herein may be mounted directly to the shelf using the techniques described herein, or by using any combination of the techniques described herein.
- a display management system is comprised of one or more pushers 520, one or more dividers 550, and a front rail 580.
- the divider 550 and the front rail 580 can sit on a shelf.
- the pusher 520 can include a pusher face 522 and a pusher floor 524, as illustrated in Figure 59 .
- the pusher face 522 can be divided into a non-adjustable portion 526 and pusher extender 528.
- the non-adjustable portion 526 and pusher extender 528 both may define a surface that may be used to contact product on the shelf. Both the non-adjustable portion 526 and the pusher extender 528 may define similar heights and depths.
- the pusher extender 528 can adjust from a position that is flush with and adjacent to the non-adjustable portion 526, as shown in Figure 59 .
- the pusher extender 528 can be directed downward toward the pusher floor 524 as in Figure 60 .
- the pusher extender 528 can be adjusted to a variety of positions as shown in Figure 60 , including a position that is parallel to the pusher floor 524 and a position that is directed upward away from the pusher floor 524 and a position that is directed downward toward the pusher floor 524. In this manner, the width or the height of the pusher 520 can be effectively extended for wider or taller products.
- the pusher extender 528 can rotate about an axis on the upper portion of the pusher 520.
- a notched wheel 532 (see Figure 77 ) can be located behind the pusher extender 528.
- the pusher extender 528 includes a protrusion (see, e.g. protrusion 530 in Figure 77 ) that fits within the notches in the notched wheel 532. As the pusher extender 528 rotates, about the axis, the protrusion rotates into the various spaces within the notches in the notched wheel 532, similar to a pawl and ratchet mechanism. Each notch represents a separate position for the pusher extender 528.
- the pusher extender 528 can remain stationary, such that a force is required to move the pusher extender 528 to a different position.
- the pusher extender may rotate from a first position that is adjacent to the non-adjustable portion 526 to one of numerous second positions that may be located within a range of approximately 180 degrees relative to the first position. The degree of adjustment may vary depending on the number, size and spacing of the notches on the notched wheel.
- the pusher extender may define a lightener aperture through the wall of the pusher extender to reduce the weight of the pusher extender and to reduce the moment created around the axis of the pusher extender.
- the pusher extender may define a smooth or textured pusher face.
- a biasing element such as a coiled spring 534
- the coiled spring 534 can be positioned adjacent the non-adjustable portion 526 of the pusher face 522.
- the coiled spring 534 can extend across the pusher floor 524 as shown in Figure 59 .
- the pusher floor 524 can include a channel 536 in which the coiled spring 534 sits.
- the channel 536 allows for product to sit on the pusher floor 524 with limited contact with the spring. The weight of the product rests on the pusher floor 524 in this embodiment.
- the pusher floor 524 also can comprise a surface with no channel.
- a divider 550 can be comprised of a divider wall 552, a floor 554 and a barrier 556, as illustrated in Figure 59 .
- a divider 550 can include no barrier.
- a divider 550 can include no floor.
- the divider wall 552 can divide the divider floor 554 into two portions, 559 and 551 (see Figure 78 ) with one portion on each side of the divider wall 552.
- the divider wall 552 also can have a divider floor 554 on only one side of the divider wall 552. As illustrated in Figure 77 , the divider wall 552 can extend perpendicularly from the divider floor 554.
- the divider floor 554 can be a planar surface.
- the divider floor 554 can include a channel within a portion of the divider floor 554.
- the coiled spring 534 can extend across the divider floor 554.
- the coiled spring 534 can extend across the divider floor 554 within a channel in the divider floor 554.
- product will not rest on the coiled spring 534 and instead will rest on the portions of the divider floor 554 that are adjacent the channel in the divider floor 554.
- the divider floor 554 does not include a channel.
- a single pusher 520 can be located on one portion of the divider floor 554 and a second pusher (see Figure 84F ) can be located on a second portion of the divider floor 554.
- one divider 550 can contain two pushers 520, one on each side of the divider wall 552.
- the barrier 556 can be configured to restrain product that is being pushed by the pusher 520 and the biasing element contained therein.
- the barrier 556 can be located at the front of the divider wall 552, as illustrated in Figure 59 .
- the barrier 556 may also be located at the rear of the divider wall to prevent overstocking of product on the shelf.
- the divider wall 552 can divide the barrier 556 into two portions.
- the barrier 556 can be perpendicular to the front end of the divider wall 552.
- the barrier 556, the divider wall 552 and the divider floor 554 are a single integrated device. These three elements can also be integral with each other.
- the barrier is separate from the divider.
- the barrier is not integral with or integrated with the divider. In another example, the barrier is configured to engage with the divider. In an example, the divider wall and the divider floor are separate devices from each other and are not integral with each other or part of a single integrated device. In an example, the divider wall and the divider floor are configured to engage with each other. In further examples, a barrier can be connected to the front rail 580 or comprise a portion of the front rail 580.
- an end 557 of a coiled spring 534 can be positioned within the barrier 556.
- the end 557 of the spring can be folded at an angle to the remainder of the spring. This angle can be 90 degrees or any other suitable angle that may be less than or greater than 90 degrees.
- the end 557 of the coiled spring can then be placed into a slot 558 within the barrier 556. Once in the slot 558, the end of the spring 557 will remain in place and will assist in biasing the pusher 520 toward the barrier 556.
- An end 557 of the coiled spring 534 can include a plurality of portions, each with bends that place a subsequent portion of the end of the coiled spring at an angle to a previous portion of the coiled spring (not shown).
- the plurality of bends can engage a plurality of slots or apertures in the barrier 556 or other connection point on the divider 550 or front rail 580.
- the plurality of slots or apertures can conform to the shape of the plurality of bends in the end 557 of the coiled spring 534.
- the coiled spring 534 can include a catch (not shown) at one end. The catch in the coiled spring 534 can be configured to prevent the coiled spring 534 from disengaging with the pusher 520, such as, for example, when the coiled spring 534 is extended.
- the pusher 520 may be connected to the divider 550 by only the coiled spring 534.
- the pusher 520 can sit on top of the divider floor 554 and can slide across the divider floor.
- the pusher 520 can be configured to rest entirely above the divider floor 554 as shown in Figure 59 and not go below the divider floor 554. In this embodiment, the pusher 520 can be picked up off the divider floor 554 as shown in Figure 62 .
- Gravity and the weight of product sitting on the pusher floor 524 maintain the pusher 520 on the divider floor 554.
- Product sitting on the coiled spring 534 also maintains the pusher 520 on the divider floor 554.
- the only integrated connection between the pusher and the divider can be the end of the coiled spring 557 that is maintained within a slot 558 in the barrier 556.
- the divider wall 552 may be used to guide the pusher 520 as the pusher 520 moves front to back, and vice versa, on the divider floor 554.
- the divider 550 can define a groove 560 or other recess in an underside portion of the divider.
- This groove 560 or other recess can be in the shape of an upside down "u" as shown in Figure 61 or can take another shape.
- the groove 560 or other recess can extend across the full width of the underside portion of the divider 550.
- the groove 560, or other recess in an example, may extend along only a portion of the width of the underside portion of the divider.
- the groove 560 or other recess may be used to engage a front rail, front wall of a tray, or other structure.
- the term recess as used herein can mean a groove, slot, channel, indentation, depression or other recess that extends inwardly.
- the divider 550 also can define a plurality of teeth 562 or other projection.
- the teeth 562 or other projection can be located at the front portion of the barrier 556.
- the teeth 562 may define a series of outwardly-extending, angled surfaces that meet or join at an apex.
- the term teeth can mean any uniform, non-uniform, continuous, non-continuous, evenly-spaced, or non-evenly-spaced outwardly-extending surfaces that may or may not be angled and that may or may not meet or join at an apex.
- the teeth may define at an apex pointed, blunt, rounded, flat, or polygonal ends, or any other suitable shape.
- the surfaces that define the shape of the teeth may be flat, convex, concave, smooth or textured, or any other suitable configuration.
- the teeth 562 are placed on an extension from the front portion of the barrier 556.
- the divider 550 also can define a resilient tongue or tab 564.
- the teeth 562 or other projection can be located on the resilient tab 564. When a force is applied to the resilient tab 564, the teeth 562 or other projection can move in the direction of the force. When the force is removed, the teeth or other projection will move back to their original position.
- projection as used herein can mean a protrusion, resilient tab, tongue, bump, tooth or plurality of teeth, ridge, knob or other projection that extends outwardly.
- a plurality of teeth can include a plurality of projections where the teeth extend outwardly and can include a plurality of recesses that extend inwardly between the portions of the plurality of teeth that extend outwardly.
- a front rail 580 can define a planar surface 582, a ridge or tongue 584 or other projection or engaging member, a channel or groove 586 or other recess or engaging member and a plurality of teeth 588 or other engaging member.
- the ridge or tongue 584 or other projection or engaging member of the front rail 580 can be configured to engage the groove 560 or other recess or engaging member of the divider.
- the ridge 584 or other projection or other engaging member can fit within the groove 560 or other recess or engaging member and inhibit the divider 550 from moving in a direction perpendicular to the ridge 584 or front rail 580 or at an angle (i.e., out of perpendicular) to the ridge 584 or front rail 580.
- the teeth 588 or other engaging member of the front rail 580 can be spaced apart.
- the teeth 588 or other engaging member of the front rail can engage the teeth 562 or other engaging member of the divider 550, which teeth 562 are illustrated in Figure 63 , so as to prevent the divider from moving in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the teeth 588 or other engaging member of the front rail 580 are engaged with the teeth 562 or other engaging member of the divider 550 and prevent the divider 550 from moving in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A" in Figure 65 .
- the term engaging member as used herein can mean a projection, recess, planar surface, near-planar surface, or other item of structure that can engage with another item of structure.
- the front rail may be a separate structure that is attached or coupled to a shelf.
- the front rail may be part of a tray that defines one or more of a front, back and opposing side walls.
- the front rail as described herein, may be formed as part of a front or back wall of a tray and still achieve the objectives of the invention. That is, the front rail may be formed as part of the tray walls (or attached to the tray walls) and receive and engage the dividers and pusher mechanisms using any of the various techniques described herein.
- the front rail also need not be located in the absolute front of a shelf.
- the front rail can be located near the front of the shelf or in a location a distance back from the front of the shelf. In an example, the front rail can be located at or near the rear of the shelf, away from the front of the merchandise display system.
- the front of the shelf can include no rail in an example.
- the teeth 562 of the divider can become disengaged with the teeth 588 on the front rail.
- the divider 550 can be moved in a lateral direction to the teeth 588 in the front rail 580 (i.e., the direction shown by arrow "A" in Figure 65 ).
- this resilient tab 564 products contained on the merchandise system 10 can be replanogrammed.
- the divider 550 is moved in a lateral direction, the divider need not be rotated.
- the divider 550 remains in a plane parallel to the planar surface 582 of the front rail 580. In addition, the divider 550 need not be lifted. The divider 550 can simply be moved in the direction noted by arrow "A" in Figure 65 .
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580 and at least one divider 550 configured to engage the front rail 580.
- the at least one divider 550 includes a barrier 556 and the at least one divider 550 further includes a divider wall 552.
- the at least one divider also includes a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, wherein the divider floor 554 is configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a cam 720 coupled to the divider 550, wherein the cam 720 is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one divider 550 is engaged with the front rail 580 and the cam 720 is in the first position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one divider 550 is engaged with the front rail 580 and the cam 720 is in the second position.
- the cam 720 includes a handle to rotate the cam 720 between the first position and the second position.
- the cam 720 can include a handle that allows the cam 720 to slide between a first position and a second position (not shown).
- the cam 720 also can include one or more cam walls configured to engage one or more groove walls in the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the second position.
- the cam 720 also can include a plurality of cam teeth configured to engage a plurality of front rail teeth on a surface of the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the second position.
- the front rail teeth can be on an inner surface of the front rail 580.
- the merchandise display system also can include a pusher mechanism having a pusher surface, a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface, and a coiled spring having a coiled end and a free end.
- the coiled end of the spring can be positioned behind the pusher surface and the pusher mechanism can be attached to the merchandise display system only by the coiled spring.
- the barrier can be configured to receive the free end of the coiled spring.
- the front rail can define a front rail groove and the divider can define a divider ridge configured to engage the front rail groove.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580 and a plurality of dividers 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580 and separate product into rows.
- Each of the plurality of dividers 550 includes a divider wall 552 extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580, a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, wherein the divider floor 554 is configured to hold product, and a cam 720 coupled to the divider 550, wherein the cam 720 is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- Each of the plurality of dividers 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when each of the plurality of dividers 550 is engaged with the front rail 580 and the cam 720 for each of the plurality of dividers 550 is in the first position.
- each of the plurality of dividers 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when each of the plurality of dividers 550 is engaged with the front rail 580 and the cam 720 for each of the plurality of dividers 550 is in the second position.
- each of the plurality of dividers 550 is configured to move in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 when product is positioned on the divider floor 554.
- a force on an outermost divider of the plurality of dividers 550 can cause each of the plurality of dividers 550 to move in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 when the cams 720 for each of the plurality of dividers 550 is in the first position, and wherein the force is in a direction parallel to the front rail 580 and perpendicular to the divider wall 552 of the outermost divider.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580 and at least one divider 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 including a barrier, a divider wall 552 extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail, a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, wherein the divider wall 552 separates the divider floor 554 into a first portion and a second portion and each of the first portion and the second portion are configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a first pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the first portion, a second pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the second portion, and a cam 720 coupled to the at least one divider 550, the cam 720 configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider 550 is movable in a lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the first position, and the at least one divider 550 resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail 580 when the cam is in the second position.
- each of the first and second pusher mechanisms of the merchandise display system include a pusher surface, a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface, and a coiled spring having a coiled end and a free end, wherein the coiled end is positioned behind the pusher surface.
- the first and second pusher mechanisms are attached to the merchandise display system only by the coiled spring.
- the at least one divider can define a divider engaging member and the at least one front rail can define a front rail engaging member, and the divider engaging member can be configured to engage the front rail engaging member.
- the divider engaging member can define divider teeth on at least one surface of the divider engaging member and the front rail engaging member can define front rail teeth on at least one surface of the front rail engaging member.
- the divider teeth can be configured to engage the front rail teeth.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580 and at least one divider 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 including a barrier configured to engage the front rail 580, a divider wall 552 extending in a direction perpendicular to front rail 580, a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, wherein the divider floor 554 is configured to hold product.
- the display system also can include a resilient tab coupled to the divider 550, the resilient tab configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider 550 is fixed in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 when the resilient tab is in the first position.
- the at least one divider 550 is movable in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 when the resilient tab is in the second position.
- the divider 550 includes a plurality of teeth configured to engage the front rail 580.
- the divider teeth can be configured to engage corresponding teeth on the front rail 580.
- the divider teeth of the merchandise display system can be configured to engage a resilient surface on the front rail 580.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580, the front rail 580 comprising at least one first projection and at least one first recess, and at least one divider 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 comprising a divider wall 552 and a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, the at least one divider 550 further comprising at least one second recess and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the divider550 configured to move between a first position and a second position,
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 is engaged with the at least one second recess of the divider 550 and the at least one second projection of the divider 550 is in the first position.
- the at least one divider 550 (a) resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) is secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one second recess of the divider 550 and the at least one second projection of the divider 550 is in the second position.
- the at least one second projection of the divider 550 can comprise a cam 720.
- the at least one first recess of the front rail 580 can comprise a groove.
- the at least one second projection of the divider 550 can include a resilient tab.
- the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 can comprise a tongue.
- the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 can comprise a plurality of teeth.
- the at least one second projection of the divider 550 can comprise a tongue.
- the at least one second projection of the divider 550 can include a plurality of teeth.
- the merchandise display system also can include a plurality of teeth on the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 and a plurality of teeth on the at least one second recess of the divider 550.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580, the front rail 580 including at least one first projection and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the front rail 580 configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the merchandise display system also includes at least one divider 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 comprising a divider wall 552 and a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, the at least one divider 550 further comprising at least one recess.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 is engaged with the at least one recess of the divider 550 and the at least one second projection of the front rail 580 is in the first position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 is engaged with the at least one recess of the divider 550 and the at least one second projection of the front rail 580 is in the second position.
- the at least one first projection of the front rail 580 can comprise a tongue and the at least one recess of the divider 550 can comprise a groove.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580, the front rail 580 comprising a first projection and a second projection.
- the merchandise display system also includes at least one divider 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 comprising a divider wall 552 and a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall 552, the at least one divider 550 further comprising a recess and a third projection.
- the at least one of the second projection or the third projection is a movable projection that is movable between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the first projection of the front rail 580 is engaged with the recess of the divider 550 and the movable projection is in the first position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the first projection of the front rail 580 is engaged with the recess of the divider 550 and the movable projection is in the second position.
- the movable projection of the merchandise display system can be a cam 720 or a resilient tab.
- the first projection of the front rail 580 can be a tongue and the recess of the divider 550 can be a groove.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580, the front rail 580 comprising at least a first engaging member.
- the merchandise display system also includes at least one divider 550 configured to attach to the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 comprising a divider wall 552 and a divider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider 550 further comprising at least a second engaging member.
- the merchandise display system also includes a third engaging member configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the first engaging member of the front rail 580 is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider 550 and the third engaging member is in the first position.
- the at least one divider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the first engaging member of the front rail 580 is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider 550 and the third engaging member is in the second position.
- the at least one divider 550 when the first engaging member of the front rail 580 is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider 550 and the third engaging member is in the first position, the at least one divider 550 is movable in the plane of a shelf (such as shelf 596 shown in Figures 70 and 71 ) only in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580; the at least one divider 550 is fixed in the plane of the shelf in all directions other than the direction parallel to the front rail 580; the at least one divider 550 may not twist, splay of fish tail in the plane of the shelf; the at least one divider 550 remains perpendicular to the front rail 580.
- a shelf such as shelf 596 shown in Figures 70 and 71
- the third engaging member can be a portion of the front rail 580 or a portion of the divider 550. In an example, the third engaging member can comprise a cam 720 or an engaging surface. In an example, the first engaging member of the front rail 580 is a projection.
- the merchandise display system also can include a pusher mechanism 520 having a pusher surface 528, a pusher floor 524 extending forwardly from the pusher surface 528, and a coiled spring 534 having a coiled end and a free end. The coiled end can be positioned behind the pusher surface 528 and the pusher mechanism 520 is attached to the merchandise display system only by the coiled spring 534.
- the merchandise display system also can include a barrier that is configured to receive the free end of the coiled spring 534.
- a merchandise display system includes a front rail 580 and at least one divider 550 configured to engage the front rail 580, the at least one divider 550 including a barrier 556, the at least one divider further including a divider wall 554, the at least one divider further including a divider floor 552 perpendicular to the divider wall 554, wherein the divider floor 552 is configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a cam 720 coupled to the divider 550, wherein the cam 720 is configured to move between a first position and a second position.
- the at least one divider 550 can be secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 when the at least one divider 550 is engaged with the front rail 580.
- the cam 720 can inhibit movement of the at least one divider 550 in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the first position.
- the cam 720 can allow movement of the divider 550 in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the second position.
- the merchandise display system can include a handle to rotate the cam 720 between the first position and the second position.
- the merchandise display system can include a handle to slide the cam 720 between the first position and the second position (not shown).
- Figures 67A-67C show an example of a step by step approach to placement of a divider into a front rail.
- the divider 550 is lowered into the channel 586 defined by the front rail 580.
- the force of lowering the divider 550 into the channel 586 causes the teeth 562 on the divider 550 to contact the top of the front rail 580 and move in a direction toward the divider 550 and away from the front rail 580, as illustrated in Figure 67B .
- the teeth 562 on the divider 550 may be ramped teeth as shown in Figure 63 .
- the front rail 580 includes recesses 589, as illustrated in Figure 64 , that are shaped to engage the teeth 562 on the divider 550.
- Figures 68A-68C show a step by step approach to placement of a divider in a front rail in another embodiment.
- the resilient tongue or tab 564 is manually pushed backward causing the teeth 562 on the tab 564 to move backward toward the divider 550.
- An axle style pivot allows for the resilient tongue or tab 564 to remain in the pushed back position and allows the teeth 562 to remain in the position toward the divider 550.
- the divider 550 is then placed in contact with the front rail 580, as illustrated in Figure 68B .
- the groove 560 of the divider 550 engages the ridge or tongue 584 of the front rail 580.
- the divider 550 can be moved in a lateral direction along the front rail and can allow for ease of replanogramming.
- the divider 550 is secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 (i.e., parallel to the divider 550) and cannot be moved in this direction, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play between the grove 560 of the divider 550 and the ridge or tongue 584 of front rail 580.
- the direction perpendicular to the front rail is noted by arrow "B" in Figure 86H .
- This insignificantly small amount of play may not be noticeable to a user of the system.
- the divider 550 can move in the plane of the shelf (the shelf is noted as 596 in Figures 70 and 71 ) only in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 (i.e., the direction noted by arrow "A" in Figure 65 ).
- the divider is fixed and immovable in the plane of the shelf under normal operating forces in all other directions other than the direction parallel to the front rail 580. The divider cannot twist, splay, fish tail or otherwise move in the plane of the shelf in a direction other than the direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the divider 550 may, however, be able to move in a direction out of the plane of the shelf, such as the direction noted by arrow "C" in Figure 87B .
- the divider 550 with or without product on the divider floor 554, can be slid in the direction previously noted by arrow "A" in Figure 65 , without requiring that the divider 550 be lifted up.
- the resilient tongue or tab 564 is manually pulled forward away from the divider 550. This movement causes the teeth 562 on the front divider 550 to fit within recesses 589 in the front rail 580.
- the recesses 589 in the front rail 580 are spaced by teeth 588 in the front rail.
- the resilient tongue or tab does not include an axle style pivot that allows for the resilient tongue or tab 564 to remain in the pushed back position. Instead, the resilient tongue or tab 564 is biased toward the front rail 580 and away from the divider 550 such that the tongue or tab 564 automatically returns to its resting position and may engage the front rail 580 when the force manually pushing the resilient tongue or tab 564 backward is removed.
- a divider 550 is placed in contact with a front rail 580.
- An engaging member of the front rail 580 engages with an engaging member of the divider 550, which secures the divider in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "B" in Figure 86H ) and renders the divider 550 immovable in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play or space between the engaging members that may not be noticeable to a user.
- the divider 550 also is secured in the plane of the shelf in all directions other than the direction parallel to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "A" in Figure 65 ).
- the divider 550 can move in the plane of the shelf only in the direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the divider 550 is fixed, under normal operating forces and conditions, in the plane of the shelf in a direction other than the direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the divider may be movable in a direction out of the plane of the shelf, such as a direction noted by arrow "C" in Figure 87B .
- arrow "C" in Figure 87B When the divider is "secured" in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580, this means that the divider 550 is immovable, under normal operating forces and conditions, in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play or space between the engaging members that may not be noticeable to a user.
- the direction perpendicular to the front rail is noted by arrow "B" in Figure 86H .
- a second engaging member of the front rail 580 or the divider 550 is in a first position and the divider is moved laterally, parallel to the front rail. The second engaging member is then moved to a second position, which makes the divider 550 fixed in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "A” in Figure 65 ) under normal operating conditions and forces.
- the divider 550 is "fixed” in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580, the divider 550 will not move in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 under normal operating conditions and forces.
- a plurality of dividers 550 can be moved as a group parallel to the front rail 580 while remaining secured to the front rail 580 in a direction perpendicular to the front rail (the direction noted by arrow "B" in Figure 86H ).
- Each of a plurality of dividers 550 can be placed in contact with a front rail 580.
- An engaging member or a plurality of engaging members of the front rail 580 engage(s) with an engaging member on each of the plurality of dividers 550, which secures each of the plurality of dividers 550 in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "B" in Figure 86H ) and renders each of the plurality of dividers 550 immovable in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play or space between the engaging members that may not be noticeable to a user.
- a second engaging member (or a plurality of second engaging members) of the front rail 580 or each of the dividers 550 is in a first position, which allows the plurality of dividers 550 to be moved laterally, parallel to the front rail 580.
- the plurality of dividers 550 can form rows between the dividers 550 that are configured for holding product.
- Product can be placed between two of the plurality of dividers 550 as shown in Figures 45-47 .
- a force can be applied to a first divider in the direction parallel to the front rail 580. This force can move the first divider in the direction parallel to the front rail 580 and cause the divider 550 to contact a product adjacent the first divider 550.
- the divider 550 then can force the product to move in the same direction as the first divider 550, i.e., parallel to the front rail 580.
- the force can move the product to come in contact with a second divider 550 adjacent the product.
- the product can then force the second divider 550 to move in in the same direction as the first divider 550 and the product, i.e., parallel to the front rail 580.
- the second divider can then force a second product adjacent the second divider 550 to move in a direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the second product can force a third divider 550 adjacent the second product to move in a direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- a series of dividers 550 and products all can be moved in a direction parallel to the front rail 580 with a single force acting on only one of the dividers 550 or products in a direction parallel to the front 580.
- the second engaging member or members on the front rail 580 or one of the plurality of dividers 550 is moved to a second position, which makes the divider 550 fixed in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 under normal operating conditions and forces, the divider 550 cannot move in the direction parallel to the front rail 580 and the divider 550 will not force other dividers 550 or products to move in a direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the second engaging member when the second engaging member is moved to a second position, the second engaging member inhibits movement of the divider 550 in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580. Under a force equal to or less than a predefined amount of force, the second engaging member prevents the divider 550 from moving in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580. When an amount of force above the predefined amount of force is applied to the divider 550 in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580, the divider 550 can move in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the thickness of the divider floor 554 varies.
- the thickness of a front portion of the divider floor 554 where it is adjacent the planar surface 582 of the front rail is less than the thickness of a rear portion of the divider floor 554 further back, where it is not adjacent the planar surface 582 of the front rail.
- the portion of divider floor 554A is thinner than the portion of divider floor 554B.
- the thickness of the front portion of the divider floor adjacent the planar surface 582 of a front rail 580 is at least 25% less than the thickness of a rear portion of the divider floor 554 that is non-adjacent the planar surface 582 of the front rail 580.
- FIG. 69A and 69B An embodiment, as illustrated in Figures 69A and 69B , includes rail mounting clips 590 for the front rail 580.
- the front rail 580 includes an aperture 592.
- This aperture 592 can be coordinated to be placed over apertures 595 on a shelf 596 in a retail environment as shown in Figure 70 .
- the rail mounting clips 590 can be curved.
- the rail mounting clips 590 also contain a narrow portion 594 at one end of the rail mounting clips 590.
- the rail mounting clips 590 can be inserted into the wider, round portion of the aperture 592 in the front rail 580 and into apertures 595 on the shelf 596 in the retail environment as shown in Figure 71 .
- the rail mounting clips 590 can then be shifted laterally to a narrower portion within the aperture 592 in the front rail 580. By shifting the rail mounting clips 590, the wider round portion of the rail mounting clips 590 will engage the narrower portion of the aperture 592 in the front rail and will be locked into place. The rail mounting clips 590 thereby hold the front rail 580 in place and prevent the front rail 580 from movement in the lateral direction. If it is known prior to shipping that a store shelf will have holes, the rail mounting clips 590 can be inserted and locked into the front rail 580 in advance of shipping. Inserting the rail mounting clips 590 in advance of shipping can add to ease of installation of the merchandise system in the store environment.
- the height of the divider wall 552 may be greater than the height of the barrier 556, as shown in Figures 72 and 73 .
- Figure 74 further displays the end 557 of the coiled spring 534 maintained within the barrier 556.
- the end 557 of the spring 534 is bent at an angle of approximately 90 degrees to the remainder of the spring body 534.
- the end 557 is placed within a slot 558 maintained within the barrier 556.
- the divider 550 contains teeth 600, as illustrated in Figures 72 and 73 . These teeth can be molded to be integral with the divider 550. The teeth 600 are not maintained on a resilient tab or tongue as in other embodiments. The teeth 600 are spaced apart from each other. A plurality of teeth 600 can be placed on the divider 550 at the bottom of a front portion of the divider 550 and in front of the barrier 556.
- a front rail 610 can include a plurality of teeth 612.
- the teeth 612 in the front rail 610 can be designed to releasably engage the teeth 600 of the divider 550 through use of a cam bar 622 in the front rail 610 and camming action, as illustrated in Figure 76 .
- the front rail 610 also includes a planar surface 614 that is substantially flat or planar and a tongue or ridge 616 that is substantially perpendicular to the planar surface 614, as illustrated in Figure 75 .
- the front rail 610 further includes a cam bar lever 618 that moves the cam bar 622 within the front rail 610, as shown in Figures 76A and 76B .
- the cam bar lever 618 is in a first position in which the teeth 612 of the front rail 610 are withdrawn into the front rail 610 away from the divider.
- the cam bar lever 618 is in a second position in which the teeth 612 of the front rail 610 are extended toward the divider 550.
- FIG 77 shows an exploded view of several aspects of an embodiment.
- Front rail 610 is shown to include an extruded shell 620, a cam bar 622 and a tooth bar 624.
- the tooth bar 624 contains a plurality of teeth 612.
- the extruded shell 620 includes a cam area 626 designed to house the cam bar 622 and the tooth bar 624.
- the cam bar 622 is located on the base of the front rail 610 adjacent to the extruded shell 620.
- the cam bar 624 is in contact with the cam bar lever 618.
- the cam bar lever 618 can operate to move the cam bar 622 back and forth in a lateral direction.
- the cam bar 622 further includes elongated cam reservoirs 628.
- the cam reservoirs 628 are diagonal with a front end of the cam reservoir 628 closer to the front end of the front rail 610 and a rear end of the reservoir 628 further back from the front end of the front rail 610.
- the tooth bar 624 may include cam studs 630.
- the tooth bar cam studs 630 are placed within the cam bar reservoirs 628 during operation of the front rail 610.
- the tooth bar cam studs 630 move in a perpendicular direction to the movement of the cam bar 622.
- the tooth bar cam studs 630 move toward the front of the front rail 610 (and away from the teeth 600 of the divider) and away from the front of the front rail 610 (and toward the teeth 600 of the divider) as the cam bar 622 moves laterally back and forth within the cam area 626.
- the tooth bar cam studs 630 move, the tooth bar 624 also moves.
- Figures 79A-79C show an example of a step by step guide to placement of the divider 550 into the front rail 610.
- the divider 550 including teeth 600 on the divider is lowered into the channel 640 of the front rail 610, as illustrated in Figure 79A .
- the tooth bar 624 initially is in a position closer to the front of the front rail 610 and the teeth 612 of the tooth bar 624 are not engaged with the teeth 600 of the divider 550.
- the cam bar lever 618 is in a first position which maintains the teeth 612 of the tooth bar 624 out of engagement with the divider teeth 600, as illustrated in Figure 79B . In this position, the divider 550 can be moved laterally along the ridge or tongue 616 of the front rail 610.
- the divider 550 can have product sit on the divider floor 554 as the divider 550 is moved laterally along the front rail in the direction shown in Figure 77 by arrow "A".
- the ridge 584 or other projection in the front rail 580 can engage the groove 560 or other recess in the divider 550 to secure the divider 550 and prevent the divider from movement in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play (e.g., less than 3 mm) between the ridge 584 and the groove 560, under normal operating conditions and forces.
- the cam bar lever 618 is then moved from a first position to second position.
- the movement of the cam bar lever 618 causes the cam bar 622 to move in a lateral direction within the extruded shell 620.
- the movement of the cam bar 622 includes movement of the diagonal cam bar reservoirs 628 in the lateral direction. Movement of the cam bar reservoirs 628 in turn causes the tooth bar cam studs 630 to move in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the cam bar 622 and in a direction toward the teeth 600 of the divider 550, as illustrated in Figure 79C .
- the tooth bar cam studs 630 are coupled to and may be integral with the tooth bar 624. Accordingly, movement of the tooth bar cam studs 630 causes the tooth bar 624 and the teeth 612 contained therein to move toward the teeth 600 of the divider.
- the tooth bar 624 is fixed on its ends such that the tooth bar 624 can only move in a direction that is toward or away from the teeth 600 of the divider.
- the tooth bar 624 cannot move in a lateral direction shown in Figure 77 by arrow "A”.
- the cam bar 622 operates in the opposite manner.
- the cam bar 622 is fixed such that the cam bar 622 can only move in a lateral direction shown in Figure 77 by arrow "A”.
- the cam bar cannot move toward or away from the teeth 600 on the divider
- Figure 80 provides an isometric view of aspects of an embodiment.
- the entire merchandise system 10 is locked.
- the front rail 610 and the divider 550 are releasably engaged with each other and will not move relative to each other.
- the pusher 520 is engaged with the divider 550.
- the merchandise system 10 can be set up in a remote location according to a particular planogram and then locked.
- the merchandise system 10 can then be shipped to the store location. At the store location the merchandise system 10 can be removed from the shipping container and placed on the shelf like a mat.
- the planogramming of the dividers 550 will remain intact while the merchandise system 10 is locked.
- a display system is assembled in a remote location away from a shelf and then moved as a unit to the shelf and secured to the shelf.
- a plurality of dividers 550 are engaged with a front rail 580 in a manner in which they are secured and will not significantly move in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580.
- the plurality of dividers 550 are adjusted laterally parallel to the front rail 580 according to a pre-panned planogram or other arrangement.
- the plurality of dividers 550 include engaging members and the front rail 580 includes engaging members.
- the engaging members on the plurality of dividers 550 and/or the engaging members on the front rail 580 are adjusted from a first position to second position to fix the plurality of dividers 550 to the front rail 580 such that the plurality of dividers cannot move in any direction in relation to the front rail 580.
- the front rail 580 and the plurality of dividers 550 are then moved as a unit to the shelf.
- the front rail 580 then is secured to the shelf.
- the dividers 550 and the product need not be removed from the shelf.
- the cam bar lever 618 or other engaging member for each of the dividers 550 can be moved to its initial position. By moving the cam bar lever 618 or other engaging member to its initial position, the teeth 612 of the tooth bar 624 release from the teeth 600 of the divider (or one engaging member disengages from another engaging member). In this position, the dividers 550 can be moved laterally in the direction denoted by arrow "A" in Figure 80 . Product can remain in place on the divider floors 554 and the pusher floors 524 while the dividers 550 are being moved.
- the cam bar lever 618 or other engaging member for each of the dividers 550 can be moved to its second position.
- the teeth 612 of the tooth bar 622 will then engage the teeth 600 of the divider 550 (or one engaging member will engage with another engaging member) and again cause the merchandise system 10 to become locked.
- Figure 81A shows the teeth 600 of the divider not engaged with the teeth 612 of the tooth bar 624.
- the cam bar 622 is adjacent the front wall of the front rail 610.
- Figure 81B the cam bar lever 618 has been moved to the second position, the cam bar 622 has moved laterally and the tooth bar cam studs 630 have moved toward the divider 550.
- the teeth 612 of the tooth bar 624 also have moved toward the divider 550 and have engaged the divider teeth 600.
- a soft rubber pad can be utilized in place of the teeth 612 on tooth bar 624 and can function as an engaging member.
- the soft rubber pad and the divider teeth 600 are not in contact with each other.
- the cam bar lever 618 is moved to its second position and the cam bar 622 moves the tooth bar 624 in the direction of the divider teeth 600, the divider teeth 600 come into contact with and thereby engage the soft rubber pad. This contact provides resistive interference and maintains the divider teeth 600 in place and prevents the divider 550 from lateral movement in the direct noted in Figure 77 by arrow "A".
- the divider 550 is held in place in contact with the front rail 580 through use of a clamp.
- Figure 82A-82C show a step by step process for insertion of the divider 550 into the front rail 580. Initially, as illustrated in Figure 82A , the divider 550 is lowered into a channel 640 formed in the front rail 580 (or 610). In addition, a ridge or tongue 644 in the front rail 580 contacts a channel 645 in the divider 550.
- the divider 550 includes a bump or outwardly extending ridge 650 at a front portion of the divider 550.
- a clamp 652 on the front rail 580 is rotated to engage the bump 650 of the divider 550.
- the clamp 652 snaps over the bump 650 and locks the bump 650 and the divider 550 into place.
- the divider 550 cannot move in the lateral direction noted in Figure 80 by arrow "A".
- the clamp 652 must be pulled to unsnap the clamp 652 from the divider bump 650.
- the divider 550 is held in place in contact with the front rail 580 through use of a rotating rod 660 that includes teeth.
- Figures 83A-83C show a step by step process for insertion of the divider 550 into the front rail 580.
- the divider 550 is lowered into a channel 640 formed in the front rail 580.
- the front rail 580 includes a rotating rod 660 which itself includes teeth.
- the teeth of the rotating rod 660 are in a first position in which they are not engaged with the teeth 600 of the divider 550.
- a handle 662 is coupled to the rotating rod 660.
- the teeth of the rotating rod 660 are in a first position in which they are not engaged with the teeth 600 of the divider 500.
- the handle 662 rotates the rotating rod 660 and moves the teeth on the rotating rod 662 into a position in which they engage the teeth 600 on the divider 550. In this position, the rod teeth are in an interfering condition with the divider teeth 600.
- the rod teeth and the divider teeth 600 are engaged with each other the divider 550 cannot move in the lateral direction noted in Figure 80 by arrow "A".
- the rod 660 To move the divider 550, the rod 660 must be returned to its first position 664 and the teeth of the rod 660 moved out of engagement with the teeth 600 on the divider 550.
- a plurality of pushers 520 and dividers 550 can be used with a single front rail 580.
- Figures 84A-84E show the use of two pushers 520 and two dividers 550 to push product toward the front of the shelf. Use of multiple pushers 520 can allow for pushing of wide product, shown schematically in the Figures.
- placing the pusher extender 528 in its upwardly extended position can allow the pushers 520 to push taller products or more products as shown in Figures 84D and 84E .
- a divider 550 can be coupled to two pushers 520.
- One pusher 520 can be engaged to a portion of the barrier 556 on each side of the divider wall 552 as shown in Figure 84F .
- the divider can be coupled to one pusher or the divider can be coupled to no pusher.
- the divider 550 is secured to the front rail 580 in part through the operation of a cam 720, as illustrated in Figure 85.
- Figure 85 illustrates a cam 720 in a side perspective view coupled to the barrier 556.
- the cam 720 includes a rounded portion 722 that is configured to rotate within a cavity 740 (see Figure 86G ) in barrier 556.
- the cam 720 also includes a tongue 724 that is comprised of a first cam wall 726, a second cam wall, 728, and a third cam wall 730.
- the cam is in a position where it is not engaged with the front rail. In this position, the first cam wall 726 can be in a substantially vertical alignment.
- the second cam wall 728 and the third cam wall 730 may also be in a substantially horizontal alignment.
- the first cam wall 726 connects with the second cam wall 728.
- the second cam wall 728 connects with the third cam wall 730.
- the cam also includes a handle 732.
- the tongue 724 only has two cam walls.
- a first cam wall such as first cam wall 726, and a second cam wall.
- the second cam wall is straight and spans the length shown by cam walls 728 and 730. There is no bend in the second cam wall in this embodiment.
- the cam walls can extend for one or more portions of the width of the divider 550 or can extend the entire width of the divider 550.
- the cam 720 may define a cam glide surface 733 (hereinafter referred to as the cam glide) located on a bottom side of the cam, opposite of the handle 732.
- the cam glide 733 serves as a low friction glide bump to improve the slidability of the divider relative to the rail.
- the cam glide 733 lifts the divider up off of the rail to reduce friction between the divider and the rail, thereby improving the slidability of the divider relative to the rail.
- the cam glide 733 of the cam 720 extends below or beneath the bottom surface of the divider and is the contact point between the divider and the rail.
- the cam glide may further define a planar surface extending outwardly from the rounded portion 722 of the cam 720.
- the cam glide 733 may be centrally positioned on the rounded portion 722 of the cam to provide stability and balance to the divider relative to the rail. It should be understood, however, that the cam glide may be located at any other suitable location on the cam.
- the planar surface of the cam glide may terminate at an elongated edge that is sized and shaped to slide freely in the channel 586 of the rail 580 to thereby permit ease of lateral movement of the divider relative to the rail.
- the elongated edge of the planar surface may define rounded or contoured edge surfaces to further aid in the free movement of the cam glide relative to the rail.
- the cam glide may define other configurations that permit the cam glide to fit within or along the rail and also permit the slidable movement of the divider relative to the rail.
- the cam glide may define a bump or rounded protrusion or a series of bumps or rounded protrusions, which would accomplish the same objective as the planar surface defining an elongated edge. While the cam 720 defining a cam glide 733 are depicted being used with a divider, the cam and cam glide may be used with the pusher or pusher assembly or other components that are mounted to the rail.
- the cam 720 defining the cam glide 733 may be mounted to the rear of the divider or pusher, and may operatively engage a rear rail that is mounted at the rear of the shelf.
- the cam 720 may be used to secure and prevent lateral movement of the divider or pusher relative to the rear rail, if used on the shelf.
- the cam and cam glide described herein may be used to secure the divider or pusher to a front rail or a back rail, or both, depending on the desired application.
- the cam 720 serves as a lock to lock the divider or pusher to either the front rail or rear rail, or both.
- the cam 720 when moved to a locked position, will lock the divider or pusher to the rail and prevent lateral movement of the divider or pusher relative to the rail.
- the cam 720 In an unlocked position, permits slidable movement of the divider or pusher relative to the rail.
- the cam 720 is rotatable or pivotable between the locked and unlocked position.
- the cam 720 defining the cam glide 733 serves the dual function of locking the divider or pusher to the rail and also enhancing the lateral slidability of the divider or pusher relative to the rail when the cam is in the unlocked position.
- the cam 720 may define a rounded portion 722 that is configured to rotate within a cavity 741 in the front of the divider.
- the cam 720 may also define a cam surface 725 and cam surface 727 that will engage the groove walls 754 and 756 of the front rail, as explained below.
- the cam 720 fits within a cavity 740 of the barrier 556, as illustrated in Figure 86G .
- the cavity 740 is bounded by side walls 742. Side walls 742 render the front of the cavity 740 slightly narrower than the width of cam 720. An amount of force is required to push cam 720 past side walls 742 and into cavity 740. After the cam passes the side walls 742 it snaps into place in the cavity 740. The cam 720 can then rotate in cavity 740 and will not fall out of cavity 740 or detach from cavity 740 during normal use.
- the cam 720 is rotatably secured within cavity 740.
- cavity 740 also is bounded at its front portion by a front wall (not shown).
- the side walls 742 do not render the front of cavity 740 narrower than the width of cam 720.
- cam 720 may be placed into cavity 740 and removed from cavity 740 without the need to overcome resistive force caused by side walls 742.
- the cam 720 defining a cam glide 733 may fit within the cavity 741 formed at the front end of the divider 550 and may be bounded by side walls 743. Side walls 743 render the front of the cavity 741 slightly narrower than the width of cam 720. An amount of force is required to push cam 720 past the side walls 743 and into cavity 741. After the cam passes the side walls 743 it snaps into place in the cavity 741 and seats on a pair of cavity surfaces 747. The cam 720 can then rotate in the cavity and will not fall out of cavity or detach from the cavity during normal use.
- the cam 720 is rotatably secured within cavity 741.
- the cavity 741 also defines an opening or slot 745 that is sized and shaped to permit rotatable movement of the cam glide 733 within the cavity.
- the slot 745 is sized and shaped to permit the planar surface of the cam glide 733 to fit therein and to thereby permit the cam to rotate within the cavity 741.
- the opening 745 also permits the cam glide 733 to extend past the bottom surface of the divider and into the rail. Once in the rail, the cam glide will lift the divider up and off of the rail and out of contact with the rail, as described above, to permit free slidability of the divider relative to the rail.
- the opening 745 also creates a clearance for the rotation of the cam glide away from the rail.
- the cam glide will consequently rotate away from the rail.
- the opening 745 formed within the cavity 741 permits this rotatable movement.
- the divider 550 is shown being lowered and placed onto the rail 580. More specifically, front portion of the divider 550 is lower into the channel 586 and the groove 560 is placed over the ridge 584.
- the cam glide 733 will contact the channel 586 and support the divider up and off of the rail 580, as shown in Figure 93B .
- the cam glide 733 supports the divider and permits free slidable movement of the divider relative to the rail.
- the cam 720 is at all times in contact with the rail 580.
- the cam glide 733 is in contact with the channel 586 of the rail 580 and lifts the divider up and off of the rail.
- the cam 720 defines cam surfaces 725, 727 and 729.
- the cam further defines a cam handle 732 located opposite the cam glide 733.
- the front rail 580 defining a rail channel 586 which receives a portion of the divider 550 and is the contact surface for the cam glide 733.
- the rail 580 further defines a rail groove 750 that further defines groove walls 752, 754 and 756, which as explained below, contact the cam surfaces during operation of the cam.
- the cam surface 725 contacts the groove wall or surface 754 while the cam surface 727 contacts the groove wall or surface 756. Also, the cam surface 729 will contact the groove wall or surface 752.
- the groove wall 752 serves as a stop to prevent further rotational movement of the cam 720.
- the handle 732 extends over the top of and even with the front edge of the front rail or past the front edge of the front rail. In an example, front of cam handle 732 is flush with the forward most portion of front rail. Human digital clearance exists between handle 732 and the front rail, sufficient for a human digit (i.e., a finger or thumb) to access the handle.
- the cam glide 733 has rotated up and off of the channel 586 of the rail 580 and has rotated into the opening 745.
- the divider now sits on and directly contacts the rail, while the cam engages the rail and secures the divider to the rail, preventing lateral movement of the divider.
- the cam 720 snaps to the rail with an audible notification heard with standard adult human hearing when in the position depicted in Figure 94C , indicating that the cam is locked to the rail.
- a user simply lifts upward on the handle 732 to release the cam surfaces 725 and 727 from the groove walls 754 and 756.
- the cam glide will rotate back into contact with the rail channel 586 and lift the divider up and off of the rail.
- the divider then will rest on the rail via the cam glide and may then be moved laterally relative to the rail, and the operation described above can be repeated.
- the cam is at all times in contact with the rail and is at all times in contact with the divider.
- the merchandise display system may include a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail.
- the divider may include a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall configured to hold product, as set forth herein.
- a front lock such as the exemplary cam 720 described herein, may be coupled to the divider.
- the front lock is configured to rotate, pivot or move between a first position and a second position. When in the first position, the front lock may permit slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail. In one embodiment, the lock may lift the divider up off of the front rail.
- the lock When in the second position, the lock locks the divider to the front rail and prevents slidable movement between the divider and the front rail.
- the cam is in constant contact with the front rail in both the first position and the second position, and all positions in between the first position and second position.
- a lock for the divider is located at an end of divider.
- the lock can be located at the front end of the divider (i.e., the end of the divider closest to or in contact with the front rail 580, which also is the end closest to the consumer selecting product).
- the lock, such as cam 720 can be forward of the divider wall 522.
- the lock, such as cam 720 can be forward of barrier 556.
- the lock When located at the front end of the divider and in front of the divider wall 522 and in front of barrier 556, the lock is digitally accessible by an individual providing maintenance to the shelf, restocking the shelf or replanogramming the shelf, even when product is on the divider floor 554 and even when the divider floor 554 is full of product (i.e., no additional product can fit on the divider floor).
- the lock (such as cam 720) can be located on the divider such that the lock is in front of product when product is on the divider floor 554 and product will not interfere with access to the lock in any position of the product when the product is on the divider floor 554.
- the cam handle 732 can be flush with the front end of the front rail 580 and can extend beyond the front end of the front rail 580.
- the merchandise display system may include a front rail, at least one divider configured to engage the front rail, and the at least one divider including a barrier.
- the at least one divider may further include a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall where the divider floor is configured to hold product.
- the merchandise display system also includes a front lock coupled to the front end of the divider.
- the front lock is in front of the barrier and in front of the divider wall.
- the front lock is configured to be digitally accessible when product is on the divider floor.
- the front lock is shiftable between a first position and a second position.
- the front lock lifts the divider up off of and out of contact with the front rail when in the first position and permits slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail.
- the front lock prevents slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail when in the second position.
- Figures 86E and 86F illustrate magnified portions of cam 720 and front rail 580.
- the cam 720 can include texturing.
- Cam 720 can include teeth or other engaging members.
- first cam wall 726 is textured with teeth 736 and 738.
- Teeth 736 can form a lower row of teeth.
- Teeth 738 can form an upper row of teeth.
- Teeth 736 and teeth 738 in an embodiment are rounded.
- teeth 736 and teeth 738 form one vertical row of teeth. Eliminating the points on the teeth can provide for better operation and longer-life for the cam teeth.
- Cam 720 also can be textured in manners other than with teeth, such as through roughening or other texturing.
- front rail 580 includes a groove 750, as illustrated in Figure 86F .
- the groove 750 may include a first groove wall 752, a second groove wall 754 and a third groove wall 756.
- First groove wall 752 is connected to second groove wall 754, which in turn also is connected to third groove wall 756.
- the groove 750 only has two groove walls.
- the second groove wall 754 is straight and spans the length shown by groove walls 754 and 756. There is no bend in the second groove wall 754 in this embodiment.
- groove 750 can be textured.
- Groove 750 can include teeth.
- first groove wall 752 includes teeth 766 and teeth 768.
- Teeth 766 can form a lower row of teeth.
- Teeth 768 can form an upper row of teeth.
- teeth 766 and 768 form one vertical row of teeth.
- Teeth 766 and 768 can be rounded.
- Teeth 766 and 768 can be placed along an entire length of groove 750.
- teeth 766 and 768 can be placed in sections along groove 750 with additional sections of groove 750 that are smooth and without teeth.
- Groove 750 also can be textured in manners other than with teeth, such as through roughening or other texturing.
- second groove wall 754 is smooth and third groove wall 756 is smooth.
- second cam wall 728 is smooth and third cam wall 730 is smooth.
- a merchandise display system 10 comprises a divider 550 and a front rail 580.
- the divider 550 comprises a divider wall 556, a divider floor 554 and a barrier 554.
- a cam 720 is rotatably coupled to a front portion of the barrier 556.
- the cam 720 includes a cam tongue 724, wherein the cam tongue 724 comprises a first cam wall 726, a second cam wall 728 and a third cam wall 730.
- the cam 720 also includes a handle 732.
- the front rail 580 comprises a groove 750 that is comprised of a first groove wall 752, a second groove wall 754 and a third groove wall 756.
- the cam 720 is configured to rotate between a first position and a second position, wherein when the cam 720 is in the second position, the cam tongue 724 is engaged with the front rail groove 750 and the divider wall 5560 is inhibited from moving in a lateral direction.
- the cam 720 also can be configured to slide between a first position and a second position.
- Figures 87A-87C show a progression in which divider 550 is coupled to front rail 580.
- the cam 720 is moved between a first position in Figure 87B to a second position in Figure 87C .
- the cam 720 allows for the divider 550 to be moved laterally along the front rail 580 or otherwise parallel to the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the first position shown in Figure 87B .
- the divider 550 is secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 and cannot move in the perpendicular direction, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play that may exist between the divider and the front rail, which may not be noticeable to a user of the system.
- the cam 720 inhibits the divider 550 from moving laterally along the front rail 580 when the cam 720 is in the second position shown in Figure 87C .
- the cam 720 will prevent the divider 550 from moving laterally along front rail 580 (and render the divider 550 immovable along the front rail 580) when the cam 720 is in the second position shown in Figure 87C .
- the cam 720 inhibits movement of the divider 550 by preventing the divider 550 from moving laterally along front rail 580 when a force equal to or less than a predefined amount of force is applied to the divider 550 in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- a force equal to or less than a predefined amount of force is applied to the divider 550 in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- Figure 87A shows divider 550 raised above front rail 580.
- divider 550 has been lowered and placed into contact with front rail 580.
- Groove 560 has been placed over ridge 584 and ridge 584 has been placed with groove 560.
- Groove 560 and ridge 584 may be in contact with each other in this position.
- Groove 560 and ridge 584 also may not be in contact with each other at all times in this position. Space can exist between the surfaces of groove 560 and ridge 584 in some positions.
- a front portion of barrier 556 also has been placed within channel or groove 586.
- the tongue 724 of cam 720 is not engaged with the groove 750 of front rail 580.
- the divider 550 can move in a lateral direction shown by arrow "A" in Figures 86F and 86H .
- Divider 550 need not be raised above front rail 580 to enable such movement.
- Divider 550 can remain in contact with front rail 580 and move in direction "A.”
- Product may be placed on the divider floor 554 during the process of moving divider 550. The ability to move divider 550 without separating divider 550 from front rail 580 or removing product provides for ease of replanogramming.
- the divider 550 can move in the plane of the shelf (the shelf is shown as 596 in Figures 70 and 71 ) only in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 shown by arrow "A" in Figures 86F and 86H .
- the divider 550 is immovable in all other directions in the plane of the shelf, such as the direction shown by arrow "B" in Figure 86H , under normal operating forces and conditions.
- the divider 550 cannot swing, rotate, splay or fish tail in the plane of the shelf and the divider 550 remains perpendicular to front rail 580 under normal operating forces and conditions.
- the divider 550 can move in the direction shown by arrow "C” in Figure 87B and thereby lift away from the front rail 580.
- the direction shown by arrow “C” in Figure 87B is not in the plane of the shelf.
- cam handle 732 has been rotated toward front rail 580.
- cam handle 732 is in contact with front rail 580.
- cam tongue 724 comes into contact with the front rail 580 and slightly deforms the front rail 580 away from cam tongue 724.
- Cam first wall 726 may be in contact with groove third wall 756 as the cam 720 is being rotated from its position in Figure 87B to its position Figure 87C .
- tongue 724 can snap into place within groove 750 and tongue 724 is engaged with groove 750.
- tongue 724 is in perfect fit with groove 750. This perfect fit involves engagement of the tongue 724 and the groove 750.
- Front rail 580 is not deformed and the cam 720 and the front rail 580 are not in tension with each other.
- First cam wall 726 is adjacent first groove wall 752.
- Second cam wall 728 is adjacent second groove wall 754.
- Third cam wall 730 is adjacent third groove wall 756. In an embodiment, the cam walls and the groove walls are in contact with each other.
- first cam wall 726 is in contact with first groove wall 752; second cam wall 728 is in contact with second groove wall 754; and third cam wall 730 is in contact with third groove wall 756.
- first cam wall 726 is in contact with first groove wall 752; second cam wall 728 is in contact with second groove wall 754; and third cam wall 730 is in contact with third groove wall 756.
- the cam walls and the groove walls are in contact with each other they are not in substantial tension with each other.
- one or more of the cam walls are in tension with one or more of the groove walls when the cam walls and groove walls are in contact with each other.
- first cam wall 726 has been placed in contact with first groove wall 752
- the teeth of first cam wall 726 engage the teeth of first grove wall 752.
- Teeth 736 engage teeth 766 and teeth 738 engage teeth 768.
- the engagement of the teeth of the first cam wall and the teeth of the first groove wall provides resistance to the divider moving laterally along the front rail in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A" (as shown in Figure 86H ).
- the cam can be unsnapped from the front rail.
- Handle 732 can be rotated away from front rail 580.
- Tongue 724 can disengage from groove 750 and return to its position in Figure 87B .
- the divider wall 552 has sections of different width (see Figure 85 ).
- a front section 770 of the divider wall 552 that can be adjacent barrier 556 can have a greater width than a rear section 772 of divider wall 552 that is adjacent barrier 556.
- Front section 770 can be connected to rear section 772 by an intermediate section 774.
- the width of intermediate section 774 gradually changes from the width of the divider front section 770 to the width of the divider rear section 772.
- the width of the portion of the intermediate section 774 adjacent section 770 is equal to the width of section 770 and the width of the portion of the intermediate section 774 adjacent section 772 is equal to the width of section 772.
- the lesser width of rear section 772 of divider wall 552 creates air space between divider walls 552 and assists in preventing product from binding between two divider walls 552 when being pushed and assists in providing for flow of product along the divider floor 554 as product is removed from the front of the merchandise system 10.
- the width of the front section 770 of the divider wall 552 is at least 25% greater than the width of the rear section 772 of the divider wall 552.
- one or more dividers 550 can be placed into contact with front rail 580.
- the dividers 550 can move parallel to the length of front rail 580 in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A" (see Figure 86H ).
- the divider 550 can then be fixed into place by snapping the cam 720 or other engaging member into engagement with front rail 580.
- the divider 550 will remain fixed under normal operating forces until the cam 720 or other engaging member is unsnapped or otherwise placed out of engagement with front rail 580.
- the front wall 561 of groove 560 is textured, as shown in Figure 86K .
- This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth.
- the texturing causes the surface of the front wall 561 of groove 560 to not be smooth.
- front wall 585 of ridge 584 or other protrusion or engaging member is textured, as depicted in Figures 86I, 86J , and 86L .
- This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth and causes the surface of front wall 585 of ridge 584 to not be smooth.
- the barrier 556 is a separate component and may removably attached to the divider 550. In at least one embodiment, the barrier 556 may snap on to the front of the divider 550. In at least one embodiment, the barrier 556 is moveable. The entire barrier 556 may be movable, or a portion or portions of the barrier 556 may be moveable. For example, the portion of the barrier 556 positioned in front of product on the merchandise display system 10 may be movable. In at least one embodiment, the portion of the barrier 556 positioned in front of the product may be configured to slide.
- the portion of the barrier 556 positioned in front of the product may be configured to rotate around an axis, to allow the portion of the barrier 556 to open and close.
- the axis may be a hinged connection.
- the portion of the barrier 556 may be spring mounted to the divider 550, such that the portion of the barrier 556 requires an amount of force to move it away from the divider 550. In this embodiment, upon release of the force, the portion of the barrier 556 will close or return to its original position. Exemplary methods for mounting the barrier 556 are described in further detail in U.S. Patent No. 8,056,734 , which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the divider 550 does not include a barrier.
- one or more barriers may be included in the front rail 580.
- front wall 561 of groove 560 is not in contact with or not in consistent contact with front wall 585 of ridge 584 while the cam 720 is in the position shown in Figure 87B and the tongue of cam 720 is not engaged with groove 750 of front rail 580.
- the cam 720 is moved from a first position shown in FIG. 87B to a second position shown in Figure 97C , and the tongue 724 engages with groove 750, the tongue can force the divider 550 to move backward.
- tension between the tongue 724 and the groove 750 forces divider 550 to move in a rearward direction.
- front wall 561 of groove 560 comes into contact with front wall 585 of ridge 584.
- Front wall 561 engages with front wall 585.
- the texturing on front wall 561 of groove 560 engages with the texturing on front wall 585 of ridge 584.
- the engagement of front wall 561 of groove 560 with front wall 585 of ridge 584 inhibits movement of the divider 550 along front rail 580 in the direction shown by arrow "A" in Figure 86H .
- the engagement of the texturing on front wall 561 of groove 560 with the texturing on front wall 585 of ridge 584 further inhibits movement of the divider 550 along front rail 580 in the direction shown by arrow "A" in Figure 86H .
- a resilient strip or bead can be included into the top surface of ridge 584, or other protrusion, of front rail 580.
- cam 720, or other engaging device When cam 720, or other engaging device, is in a first position, the resilient strip or bead is not compressed. In this first position, the divider 550 can move in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail, but cannot move in a direction perpendicular to the front rail.
- cam 720, or other engaging device is moved to a second position, the resilient strip or bead comes into compression with groove 560, or other recess, of divider 550.
- divider 550 When the resilient strip or bead is in compression with groove 560, or other recess, divider 550 becomes fixed under normal operating forces in a direction parallel to the front rail 580.
- the portion of the groove 560, or other recess, that comes into contact with the resilient strip or bead of front rail 580 can include a roughening or teeth (not shown).
- barrier 556 is not molded at the same time as divider wall 552 and divider floor 554.
- Barrier 556 is molded as a separate piece from divider wall 552 and divider floor 556, as shown in Figure 88A .
- Barrier 556 may be molded of a clear material, whereas divider wall 552 and divider floor 554 may be molded of an opaque material.
- a divider 550 includes an engaging member that comprises a planar surface.
- the front rail 580 can include an engaging member that comprises a planar surface.
- the planar surface of the engaging member on the divider and/or the engaging member on the front rail can comprise a smooth or substantially smooth surface.
- the planar surface can include a resilient surface.
- the planar surface can include a rubber strip or a neoprene strip or material that is otherwise compressible.
- the divider 550 When the engaging member of the divider 550 is in a second position it is engaged with the engaging member of the front rail 580 and the divider is fixed and not movable laterally parallel to the front rail under normal operating conditions and forces.
- the divider 550 can have additional lateral adjustability and infinite or near infinite lateral adjustability.
- the lateral adjustability of the divider 550 is not limited by the physical dimensions, such as width, of projections or teeth. Infinite lateral adjustability provides significant benefits to display systems by efficiently utilizing lateral space and limiting or minimizing unused or lost space between product rows and thereby potentially increasing the amount of usable space and lateral product facings on a shelf.
- barrier 556 can be snap fit or otherwise engaged with divider 550, as shown in Figure 88B .
- the engagement between barrier 556 and divider 550 can be such that barrier 556 cannot be removed from divider 550 under normal operating conditions and without deleteriously affecting the structure of barrier 556 or divider 550.
- Figures 89A-89C show an example of a step by step approach to placement of a divider in a front rail.
- the divider 550 may be lowered into contact with the front rail 590.
- a rotating "T" lock 900 may be rotated to snap over the front rail 580.
- the rotating "T” lock 900 may be attached to a front portion of the divider 550.
- the rotating "T” lock 900 may rotate around an axis 903.
- the divider 550 may be lowered and placed in contact with the front rail 580, as illustrated in Figure 89B .
- the groove 560 or other recess of the divider 550 engages the ridge or tongue 584 or other protrusion of the front rail 580.
- the divider 550 can be moved in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and can allow for ease of replanogramming.
- the divider 550 can move along the front rail.
- the divider 550, with or without product on the divider floor 554, can be slid in the direction previously noted by arrow "A" in Figure 65 , without requiring that the divider 550 be lifted up.
- the rotating "T" lock 900 may be pushed forward and downwardly toward the front rail 580.
- the rotating "T" lock 900 may engage with a lip 901 on a front portion of the front rail 580.
- the front rail 580 includes a top front surface 902.
- the top front surface 902 may include a texture or may be a resilient surface, such as rubber. Alternatively, the top front surface 902 may include one or more teeth. The top front surface 902 may engage with a surface 904 on the rotating "T" lock 900. The surface 904 may also include a texture or may be a resilient surface, such as rubber. Alternatively, the surface 904 may include teeth configured to engage the teeth on the top front surface 902. When the rotating "T" lock 900 engages lip 901, the divider 550 is engaged to the front rail 580 and cannot move in a lateral direction under a normal amount of force.
- Figures 90A-90F illustrate embodiments of the divider 550 and front rail 580.
- a divider 550 may include wall 552, a floor 554 and a barrier 556.
- the divider wall 552 may divide the divider floor 554 into two portions, 559 and 551 with one portion on each side of the divider wall 552.
- the divider wall 552 may extend perpendicularly from the divider floor 554.
- the barrier 556 may be located at the front of the divider wall 552.
- the bottom surface of the divider floor 554 may include a groove 560 or other recess, a tongue 941 or other protrusion, and a front wall 561.
- the front wall 561 of groove 560 is textured. This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth. The texturing may cause the surface of the front wall 561 of groove 560 to not be smooth.
- a front rail 580 can define a planar surface 582, a ridge or tongue 584 or other projection, a first channel or groove 586 or other recess, and a second channel or groove 950 or other recess.
- the front wall 561 of the divider 550 may engage the first groove 586 of the front rail 580.
- the ridge or tongue 584 of the front rail 580 may engage the groove 560 of the divider 550.
- the tongue 941 of the divider 550 may engage the second groove 950 of the front rail 580.
- front wall 585 of ridge 584 is textured. This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth and causes the surface of front wall 585 of ridge 584 to not be smooth.
- the texturing of the front wall 585 of the ridge 584 may engage with the texturing of the front wall 561 of groove 560.
- the engagement of the front wall 561 of the divider 550 to the first channel 586 of the front rail 580, the engagement of the ridge or tongue 584 of the front rail 580 to the groove 560 of the divider 550, and the engagement of the projection 941 of the divider 550 to the second groove 950 of the front rail 580 may keep the divider wall 552 perpendicular to the front rail 580 and prevent a back portion of the divider 550 from splaying.
- the divider 550 may be moved laterally parallel to and/or along the front rail 580 when the divider 550 receives a lateral force.
- the front rail 580 may include apertures 951 and openings 952, as illustrated in Figure 90E .
- the apertures 951 may be configured to engage with corresponding engagement projections (not shown).
- the engagement projection can be a flat splicer.
- the corresponding engagement projections may connect one or more front rails 580 together in series.
- the connection of the apertures 951 and engagement projections can allow for one or more front rails 580 to be connected in series, even if the front rails 580 are not in perfect alignment with each other.
- the openings 952 may be configured to receive fasteners, which fasten the front rail 580 to a display shelf.
- the front rail 580 may include any number of opening 952 suitable for securing the front rail 580 to a display shelf. Any type of fastener may be contemplated within the scope of the invention.
- the merchandise display system 10 may include a back rail 810.
- the back rail 810 can be located at or near the back of a shelf.
- the back rail 810 may be a similar construction as the front rail 580 and the disclosure herein regarding the front rail 580 applies equally to the back rail 810.
- the back rail 810 may include a recess 804, which may generally be in the shape of a "u".
- the dividers 550 may be connected to divider blocks 802. The divider blocks 802 may then engage with the back rail 810.
- the back rail 810 can be a second rail in the merchandise display system, along with the front rail 580.
- the back rail 810 also can be the only rail in the merchandise display system.
- front rail 580 can be located at the rear of the merchandise display system and thereby function as a back rail 810.
- the plurality of divider blocks 802 each has a cam 710 (not shown in Figure 91A ) in the location denoted by the arrow in Figure 91A .
- This cam 720 can rotate from a first position to a second position and have the same effect as the cam 720 in the divider that engages with the front rail 580.
- the divider blocks 802 also can include other engaging devices, including the engaging devices described herein for the divider 550, that engage with the back rail 810.
- the use of the back rail 810 may keep the back of the dividers 550 in position and prevent product from moving to a position behind the pusher 520.
- the 720 or other engaging device is rotated away from the back rail 810 or otherwise disengaged with the back rail 810.
- a divider 550 can be placed into contact with a front rail 580.
- Groove 560 can be placed over ridge 584 and ridge 584 can be placed within groove 560. Groove 560 and ridge 584 can be in contact with each other in this position.
- Divider 550 also can be placed into contact with rear rail 810.
- a groove or other recess in the divider 550 can be placed over a ridge or other protrusion of rear rail 810 and the ridge or protrusion of the rear rail 810 can be placed within a groove or other recess of divider 550.
- Divider 550 can be in contact with front rail 580 and rear rail 810 at the same time.
- An engagement device, such as cam 720, on the front of the divider can be in a position such that the divider 550 can move laterally parallel to the front rail 580 and the rear rail 810, but the divider 550 is immovable in a direction perpendicular to front rail 580 or rear rail 810 (the direction between front rail 580 and rear rail 810).
- the divider block 802 also can include an engagement device (not shown), such as cam 720 or other engagement devices described above with respect to the front rail 810.
- the engagement device on divider block 802 can be in a position such that the divider 550 can move laterally parallel to the front rail 580 and the rear rail 810, but the divider 550 is fixed in a direction perpendicular to front rail 580 or rear rail 810 (the direction between front rail 580 and rear rail 810).
- the engagement device on the front of the divider 550 can be moved to a second position. In the second position the divider 550 is fixed in a direction parallel to the front rail 580 under normal operating forces.
- the engagement device on divider block 802 also can be moved to a second position. In the second position, the engagement device on divider block 802 renders the divider 550 fixed in a direction parallel to the rear rail 810 under normal operating forces.
- the front rail 580, divider 550 and rear rail 810 can form a rigid tray that may be moved as a unit from one location to another.
- the front rail 580, rear rail 810 and a plurality of dividers 550 can be preassembled and formed into a rigid tray in a location away from the shelf.
- the front rail 580, rear rail 810 and a plurality of dividers 550 can then be moved to the shelf and secured to the shelf by one or more fasteners.
- a merchandise display system can include a barrier that is moveable by rotation between a folded position and an upright position without the aid of, for example, a rotation biasing element (such as a spring loaded hinge) dedicated to biasing the barrier into the upright position.
- a rotation biasing element such as a spring loaded hinge
- FIGS 95-106 Various example aspects of example systems that can include a barrier that is moveable between a folded position and an upright position without the aid of a rotation biasing element are shown in Figures 95-106 .
- the system can include a divider assembly 550 configured to be secured to a support structure.
- a divider assembly 550 can also be referred to as a divider 550.
- a support structure can include, for example, a front rail 580.
- a divider 550 can include forward end 553 and a rearward end 555. Movement in the forward direction as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier is defined by movement from the rearward end 555 toward the forward end 553. For example, the arrow F depicted in Figures 99B and 100D is pointing toward the forward direction. Movement in the rearward direction as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier is defined by movement from the forward end 553 toward the rearward end 555. For example, the arrow R depicted in Figures 99A and 100C is pointing toward the rearward direction.
- a divider 550 can include a divider wall 552 having a right side surface 552a and a left side surface 552b.
- the divider wall 552 can extend from the forward end 553 of the divider 550 to the rearward end 555.
- the divider wall 552 can extend upwardly from a divider floor 554.
- the divider floor can include a top surface 554a and a bottom surface 554b.
- the divider wall 552 separates the divider floor 554 into a first side portion 559 and a second side portion 551 on each side of the divider 550.
- the first side portion 559 of the divider floor 554 can also be referred to as the right side portion 559 of the divider floor 554 and the second side portion 551 can also be referred to as the left side portion 551 of the divider floor 554.
- barriers 556 are moveable by rotation between a folded position, as shown by example in Figure 96B for the barrier 556a on the right side of the divider, to an upright position, as shown by example in Figure 96A for both barriers 556a, 556b.
- barriers 556 can be connected to a rotational mounting structure 563.
- the rotational mounting structure 563 can be directly connected to the divider.
- the rotational mounting structure 563 can be removably connected to the divider.
- the rotational mounting structure 563 can be a knuckle 565 and pin 566 type hinge.
- the rotational mounting structure 563 can be a flexible member, such as flexible polymer or metal component.
- barrier 556 can be considered positioned proximate the forward end 553 of the divider 550 when a product positioned on the top surface 554a of the divider floor 554 can contact the barrier 556 when the product moves in the forward direction toward the forward end 553 of the divider 550.
- the rotational mounting structure 563 is proximate to and connected to the forward end 553 of the divider 550 and/or the divider floor 554.
- the barrier 556a is shown positioned proximate to and is connected to the forward end 553 of the divider 550 and the divider floor 554.
- the barrier 556 can be positioned proximate to the forward end 553 of the divider 550 and/or the divider floor 554 while being spaced from and/or not being directly connected to either the forward end 553 or the divider floor 554 (not shown).
- the barrier can be removably connected to the front rail 580 and not connected to the divider 550 but positioned close enough to the divider such that a product positioned on the top surface 55a of the divider floor 554 can contact the barrier 556 when the product moves in the forward direction (not shown).
- the barrier 556 can be considered positioned proximate the forward end 553 of the divider 550.
- the barrier 556 can be positioned proximate to the forward end of the divider and be connected to the divider wall.
- the barrier can fold toward the divider wall when moving toward the folded position (not shown).
- the barrier 556 is configured to rotate between an upright position and a folded position.
- An example upright position is shown in Figure 98A and an example folded position is shown in Figure 98C .
- the top edge 568 of the barrier 556 can rotate along the arc shown as B in Figure 98A .
- a force applied in the rearward direction R to a barrier 556 in the upright position can cause the barrier to rotate toward the folded position, as shown in Figure 98B , to reach the folded position as shown by example in Figure 98C .
- the barrier 556 can be rotated manually by digitally pulling or pushing the barrier handle 567 to, respectively, raise the barrier to the upright position or lower the barrier to the folded position.
- the top edge 568 of the barrier 556 can rotate along the entire arc of B and C such that the top edge contacts the top surface of the divider floor (not shown).
- the barrier 556 in the folded position, defines a folded angle C in between a rear surface 569 of the barrier and the top surface 554a of the divider floor.
- the folded angle C is between about 45 degrees to about 20 degrees.
- the folded angle C is between about 30 degrees and 15 degrees.
- the term "about” as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier means plus or minus 5% of the stated value.
- the folded angle is about 20 degrees.
- a folding stop structure 570 is configured to stop rotation of the barrier 556 toward the divider floor 554 and maintain the barrier at a desired folded angle C in the folded position.
- the folding stop structure 570 is a protrusion positioned proximate a lower portion of the rear surface 569 of the barrier.
- the folding stop structure is connected to the top surface 554a of the divider floor such that the lower portion 587 of the rear surface of the barrier contacts the folding stop structure 570 when barrier reaches the folded angle C in the folded position.
- the folding stop structure is connected to the lower portion of the rear surface of the barrier so that the folding stop structure contacts the top surface of the divider floor when the barrier reaches the desired folded angle in the folded position (not shown).
- the folding stop structure is an extension or plateau or plate secured to or integral with the divider floor 554.
- the divider floor prevents the barrier 556 from becoming completely horizontal.
- the barrier 556 is configured such that when the barrier 556 is rotated to the folded position, the barrier is at an angle from horizontal. This angle can be about 10 degrees, 15 degrees, 20 degrees or between about 20-45 degrees or between about 10-35 degrees.
- the barrier has a horizontal portion and a vertical portion that allow the barrier 556 to be at a predetermined angle to the divider floor when the barrier 556 is in contact with the divider floor 554.
- the stop structure 570 does not exist and the barrier 556 contacts the divider floor 554 directly on the horizontal top surface 554a of the divider floor.
- a force applied in the forward direction to a product positioned in contact with at least a portion of the rear surface 569 of the barrier 556 while the barrier is in the folded position can cause the barrier to rotate from the folded position to the upright position.
- a product can be placed on the top surface 554a of the divider floor 554 while the barrier is in the folded position.
- a force can be applied to the product to move the product in the forward direction toward the barrier, as shown by example in Figure 99B .
- the force is gravity.
- a divider 550 positioned so that the forward end 553 is angled downwardly relative to the rearward end can cause products positioned thereon to move by gravity alone toward the forward end 553.
- the force can be applied by a pusher mechanism 520.
- the pusher mechanism 520 can be biased in the forward direction and can be configured to slide across the divider floor and move the product in the forward direction.
- the top edge 568 of the rear surface 569 of the barrier is rounded off or defines a curved or radiused surface.
- the rounded edge of the top of the rear surface of the barrier assists in rotation of the barrier by, for example, allowing the barrier 556 to slip or slide up the surface of the product as the movement vector of the barrier changes while rotating toward the upright position as the product moves forward.
- the rounded edge prevents the edge from digging into the surface of the product packaging and maintains a low friction between the rounded edge and the product as the product moves forward and the rounded edge moves up the surface of the product.
- the top of the barrier can include other structures to facilitate the sliding of the barrier up the surface of the product such as, for example, a roller structure. In an embodiment, when the barrier reaches the upright position, the barrier ceases rotation and ceases movement of the product in the forward direction.
- a vertical stop structure is configured to stop rotation of the barrier in the forward position and establish the upright position of the barrier.
- the vertical stop structure can be a vertical surface 571 on the rotational mounting structure and an opposing vertical surface 572 on the barrier 556.
- aspects of a rotational barrier described in the examples above can be used, for example, in an embodiment of merchandise display system that includes a pair of dividers 550a, 550b and a pusher mechanism 520.
- the dividers 550a, 550b can define a product pocket 573 in between the opposing walls of the dividers.
- the product pocket 573 can, for example, have a width that is slightly greater than a product which is intended to be displayed in the system.
- the barriers can be positioned in the folded position as shown in Figure 100B to facilitate placement of the product in the system.
- manual positioning of a product against the front surface 556f of the barriers in the upright position and pushing of the product in the rearward direction against the front surface 556f of the barriers can cause the barriers to rotate to the folded position and allow the product to be easily inserted into the product pocket 573 as shown in Figure 100C .
- the pusher mechanism pushes the product in a forward direction F and causes the product to rotate the barriers from the folded position to the upright position, as shown in Figure 100D , where the forward movement of the product is then ceased.
- an example removable rotational mounting structure 563 can include a vertical stanchion 591, horizontal cross beam 593, and rotational mounts 597a, 597b connected to the horizontal cross beam 593.
- the vertical stanchion 591 can be an elongate post oriented in the vertical direction and the horizontal cross beam 593 can be an elongate beam oriented horizontally in the lateral direction.
- the stanchion can include a gripping structure near the top portion of the stanchion to facilitate manual insertion and removal of the rotational mounting structure 563 onto or off of the divider 550.
- the horizontal cross beam 593 is connected to the vertical stanchion 591 and extends from the opposite sides of the vertical stanchion in a cross-like manner such that a left section 593b of the horizontal cross beam 593 extends in a lateral direction from a left side 591b of the vertical stanchion 591 and a right section 593a of the horizontal cross beam 593 extends in the lateral direction from a right side 591a of the vertical stanchion 591.
- a right rotational mount 597a is connected to the right section 593a of the horizontal cross beam 593 and a left rotational mount 597b is connected to the left section 53b of the horizontal cross beam 593.
- each section 593a, 593b of the horizontal cross beam extend to a length about equal to the width of the respective side portions 559, 551 of the divider floor 554.
- a rotational mount can include a knuckle and pin type hinge or flexible member.
- the rotational mount 597a can include a first knuckle component 601 and the barrier can include a second knuckle component 602, the first and second knuckle components are complimentary such that a pin 566 can extend through the first and second knuckle components to form a hinge for rotational attachment of the barrier 556a to the rotational mount 597a and rotational mounting structure 563.
- a rotational mount 597a includes a folding stop structure 570a configured to stop rotation of the barrier 556a toward the divider floor 554a and maintain the desired folded angle C for the folded position.
- the folding stop structure 570a is a plate 603 extending from and integral with the rotational mount 597a or horizontal cross beam 593a, the plate 603 having a raised or angled portion 615 configured to define the folded angle C.
- the folding stop structure is connected to the lower portion of the rear surface 569 of the barrier so that the folding stop structure contacts the top surface of the divider floor 554 or plate 603 when the barrier reaches the desired folded angle in the folded position (not shown).
- the folding stop structure is integral with the divider floor.
- a rotational mount 597a includes a vertical stop structure configured to stop rotation of the barrier in the forward position and establish the upright position of the barrier.
- the vertical stop structure can be a vertical surface 571 on the rotational mount and an opposing vertical surface 572 on the barrier 556.
- the vertical surface of the vertical stop structure of the rotational mount can be within a mount recess 604 defined within the rotational mount 597a and the opposing vertical surface 572 on the barrier 556 can be on a tab 605 formed on the bottom portion of the barrier.
- the mount recess 604 can be of complimentary shape with the tab 605 so that the tab fits into the mount recess 604 when the barrier rotates in the forward direction.
- the stanchion 591 can include a mount slot 598 defined in the stanchion which is configured to mate with a front ridge 599 of the divider 550 to removably connect the rotational mounting structure 563 to the forward end 553 of the divider 550.
- the rotational mounting structure removably connects to the divider using clip, cam, or other coupling structure.
- an example removable rotational mounting structure 563 can include a horizontal cross beam 593 and rotational mounts 597a, 597b connected to the horizontal cross beam 593.
- the horizontal cross beam 593 extends in a lateral direction and has a length about equal to the width of respective side portions 559, 551 of the divider floor 554.
- a right rotational mount 597a is connected to a right section 593a of the horizontal cross beam 593 and a left rotational mount 597b is connected to a left section 593b of the horizontal cross beam 593.
- the horizontal cross beam 593 is configured to have a low-profile where the height of the beam over the divider block 802 is minimized.
- a low-profile horizontal cross beam 593 can provide for more space for product to be inserted over the removable rotational mounting structure 563 from the forward direction into the merchandise display system.
- the horizontal cross beam 593 can include a forward extension 593c of the horizontal cross beam that extends toward the front of the divider block 802.
- the forward extension 593c of the horizontal cross beam 593 can extend forward of the front of the divider block 802 and include an extension hook 593e configured to extend downward from the forward end of the forward extension so that the extension hook is positioned in front of the divider block 802 when the removable mounting structure is secured in place on the divider.
- the rotational mounting structure includes a forward extension 593c and extension hook 593e extending from a right section 593a of the horizontal cross beam 593 and a forward extension 593d and extension hook 593f extending from a left section 593b of the horizontal cross beam 593.
- the forward extensions 593c, 593d and extension hooks 593e, 593f can, for example, assist in stabilizing the removable mounting structure on the divider.
- the removable mounting structure 563 includes a first plate 603a extending from the right rotational mount 597a or right section 593a of the horizontal cross beam 593 and a second plate 603b extending from the left rotational mount 597b or left section 593b of the horizontal cross beam 593.
- the plates 603a, 603b can extend in the lateral direction from either side of the rotational mounts 597a, 597b.
- the inside edges of the plates 603a, 603b can be configured to define a mount slot 598 configured to mate the removable mounting structure 563 with the front ridge 599 of the divider 550 to removably connect the rotational mounting structure 563 to the forward end 553 of the divider 550.
- each plate 603a, 603b can include a folding stop structure 570a, 570b.
- the folding stop structure can include a raised or angled portion 615a, 615b configured to define the folded angle C.
- the barrier 556 includes a resilient tab 606 configured to engage a tab recess 604a defined in the rotational mount 597 when the barrier reaches the upright position, as shown in Figure 105B .
- the resilient tab 606 is configured to hold the barrier in the upright position when it engages tab recess 604a.
- the tab recess 604a is defined in the mount recess 604.
- the resilient tab 606 flexes and disengages from the tab recess 604a so that the barrier can move toward the folded position, shown in Figure 105D .
- the mount recess 604 includes a folding stop structure 604b.
- the tab resilient 606 engages the folding stop structure to stop rotation of the barrier 556 toward the divider floor 554 and maintain the desired folded angle of the folded position.
- the folding stop structure 604b is defined in the mount recess 604 and can be, for example, an angled portion as shown in Figure 105A .
- a system can include a divider assembly 550 configured to be secured to a support structure, such as a front rail.
- the divider wall 552 can include a divider wall extension 552a configured to increase the height of the divider wall.
- the divider wall extension 552a and the divider wall 552 can include tongue and groove components configured to secure the extension to the divider wall.
- the front edge 552d of the divider wall can be rounded.
- the rounded edge can, for example, prevent a product package from catching on the edge and tearing.
- the thickness of divider wall can be increased to improve the strength of the wall and, for example, accommodate the tongue and groove components for the divider wall extension. Examples of systems that use divider walls of increased thickness can be useful for heavier products, such as cases of canned soda, which may require more robust aspects of a display system than smaller, lighter products.
- the width of the system and barriers can be increased to, for example, accommodate larger products that may require more shelf space.
- the folding stop structure 570 is defined in the divider floor 554.
- a merchandise display system can include a first divider 550a and second divider 550b.
- the first and second divider can also be referred to as a left side divider 550a and a right side divider 550b.
- the first and second dividers can include first and second divider walls that extend from the forward end to the rearward end of the respective dividers.
- a product pocket 573 can be defined in between the opposing first and second divider walls.
- the first divider can include a first barrier 556c positioned at the forward end of the divider 550a and to the right of the first divider wall.
- the second divider 550b can include a barrier 556d positioned at the forward end of the second divider and to the left of the second divider wall.
- the system can include a pusher 520 positioned in between the first and second dividers.
- the pusher can include a biasing element which biases the pusher in the forward direction F toward the forward ends of the dividers.
- the barriers 556c, 556d can be in a first, upright position as shown in Figure 100A . Referring to Figure 100B , the barriers 556c, 556d can be positioned in a second, folded position by, for example, digitally moving the barriers into the second position or using the product to push the barriers into the second position while positioning the product in the product pocket.
- the product can be placed in the product pocket by moving the product over the top of the barriers which are in the first, upright position and directly into the product pocket.
- the product can be positioned forward the product pusher and in contact with the front surface of the product pusher so that the product pusher is in position to move the product forward when the product is released.
- the pusher 520 moves the product forward so that the product contacts the barriers.
- the pusher can push the product forward so that the product contacts the barriers and moves the barriers from the second, folded position to the first, upright position.
- the barriers cease the forward movement of the pusher and the product when the barriers reach the first, upright position, as shown in Figure 100D .
- the product can be positioned in the product pocket by moving the product over barriers which are positioned in the first, upright position.
- the pusher can move the product forward until the product contacts the barriers which are in the first, upright position - where then the forward movement of the product will be stopped, as shown in Figure 100D .
- an improved product tray 578 can include a bottom surface 574, right side wall 575, left side wall 576, and an alignment flap 577.
- the alignment flap 577 can have a proximate end 579, a distal end 581, a right edge 583, and a left edge 587.
- a flap width D of the alignment flap 577 can be defined in between the right edge 583 and the left edge 587 of the alignment flap 577.
- the flap width D is about equal to the width of the product in the product tray 578.
- the length of the alignment flap is defined in a direction perpendicular to the width D.
- the length of the alignment flap can vary.
- the length of the alignment flap can be about equal to the height of the barrier 556 or the height of the product.
- the proximate end 579 of the alignment flap is configured to be connected to the bottom surface 574 of the product tray.
- the alignment flap 577 is configured to be positioned in between opposing divider walls of a merchandise display system such that the alignment flap aligns the product tray and the product stored in the product tray with the product pocket so that the product stored in the product tray can be slid from within the product tray, as shown in Figure 101D , directly into the product pocket of the merchandise display system, as shown in Figure 101E .
- a portion of the alignment flap can be tapered toward the distal end to aid in insertion of the alignment flap between the opposing divider walls of the system.
- the alignment flap can be used to move the barriers from the upright position to the folded position to facilitate sliding of the product from the product tray into the product pocket of the system.
- the alignment flap is positioned within the product pocket such that the alignment flap moves the barriers from the upright position to the folded position (as shown in Figures 101C and 101D ), product can then be slid from the product tray into the product pocket of the system (as shown in Figure 101E ), and the alignment flap is removed from the product pocket and removed from contact with the barriers.
- the pusher in an embodiment with a pusher (as shown in Figure 101E ), the pusher can then push the product forward so that the forward-most product contacts the barriers and moves the barriers from the folded position to the upright position.
- the alignment flap is used to temporarily move the barriers from the upright position to the folded position for stocking of the system.
- the barriers can be physically removed from the system so that the system may be stocked with product.
- the barriers can be configured to rotate from the upright position toward the forward direction so that, for example, the top of the barrier extends beyond the front end of the divider in the forward direction. Such position can be referred to as a forward folded position.
- the barrier can be configured to rotate from the folded position, to the upright position, and beyond the front end of the divider in the forward direction to reach the forward folded position (not shown).
- a barrier that can rotate in the forward direction beyond the forward end of the divider can include a rotational stop and define angles relative to the divider floor as described above in regard to barriers that rotate only between the upright position and folded position as described above.
- the barriers can be configured to slide in the lateral direction, left and/or right.
- the barriers can be manually positioned in the folded position, upright position, and/or folded forward position.
- an unbiased barrier 556 is connected to a divider floor 554.
- the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to be adjustable from a first position to a second position. In a first position, the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to inhibit or prevent product on the divider floor 554 from moving beyond the front edge of the divider 550. In a first position, the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to inhibit product from being placed onto the divider floor 554. In a first position, the unbiased barrier is configured to be vertical. In a second position, the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to allow product to be placed onto the divider floor 554. In the second position the unbiased barrier is horizontal or diagonal in respect to the divider floor 554 or shelf or other structure on which the divider 550 resides.
- the unbiased barrier 556 in the second position is configured to be horizontal to the divider floor 554, or the shelf or other structure on which the unbiased barrier 556 resides; or the unbiased barrier 556, in the second position, is configured to be rotated or adjusted at a horizontal angle from the divider floor 554.
- the horizontal angle from the divider floor 554 can be 20 degrees, can be between approximately 10 and 30 degrees, or can be between approximately 20 and 45 degrees.
- the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to have no spring or other biasing element forcing it between a first position and a second position.
- the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to be freely adjustable from the first position to the second position.
- the unbiased barrier 556 is configured such that it can be moved to the first position and will remain in the first position and can be moved to the second position and will remain in the second position.
- the unbiased barrier 556 is configured to be unbiased and to include no biasing mechanism such as a spring or other device that places a force on the unbiased barrier 556 to force the unbiased barrier into the first position or the second position.
- external objects such as product shown in Figures 99A-99C or a product tray 578 or alignment flap 577 or a wall of the product tray 578 shown in Figures 101A-101C or a hand or digit of a human, can move or force the unbiased barrier 556 from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position.
- Product or a tray 578 or alignment flap 577 or a human digit can exert a force on the unbiased barrier 556 such that the unbiased barrier 556 moves from a first position which is substantially vertical to the divider floor 554 to a second position which is diagonal or a second position which is substantially horizontal.
- the unbiased barrier 556 is configured so that product can be placed onto the divider floor 554 and allow for product to be restocked in a prompt manner.
- a pusher 520 exerts a force on the product in the direction toward the front of the divider 550 and the front of the product shelf or other structure on which the divider 550 is residing.
- the pusher can be a spring-urged pusher in which a spring or other biasing unit exerts a force on the pusher, biasing it toward the front of the divider 550.
- the spring or other biasing unit is not physically connected to or in direct contact with the unbiased barrier 556.
- the product in turn exerts a force on the unbiased barrier 554 that forces the biased barrier into a first position.
- the unbiased barrier prevents the product from moving beyond the front edge of the divider 550 or shelf or other structure on which the divider 550 is secured.
- multiple products can be positioned in the product pocket of the system.
- a consumer can, for example, remove the forward-most product.
- the pusher can push the remaining product in the product pocket forward so that the next product in line contacts the barriers and forward movement of the product stops.
- a product in the forward-most position is replaced with next product in line, thereby maintaining product in the forward-most position until the product in the pocket 573 runs out.
Landscapes
- Display Racks (AREA)
- Freezers Or Refrigerated Showcases (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Thermal Sciences (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- The exemplary embodiments relate generally to a shelf assembly for use in merchandising product and more particularly to a shelf assembly having improved mechanisms for displaying and pushing product on the shelves.
- It is known that retail and wholesale stores, such as convenience stores, drug stores, grocery stores, discount stores, and the like, require a large amount of shelving both to store product and to display the product to consumers. In displaying product, it is desirable for the product on the shelves to be situated toward the front of the shelf so that the product is visible and accessible to consumers. In the case of coolers or refrigerators that are used to store and display such products as soft drinks, energy drinks, bottled water, and other bottled or canned beverages, it is desirable for these products to also be situated toward the front of the shelf and visible and accessible to the consumers.
- To accomplish this placement of product, known systems may include inclined trays or floors that through gravity will cause the product to move toward the front of the shelf. Many of these systems include floors or shelves made of a plastic material such as polypropylene that due its low coefficient of friction permit the product to easily slide along the inclined floor or surface. However, over time, these surfaces can become obstructed with debris or sticky substances that inhibit the product from properly sliding, sometimes causing several products to tip over thus blocking additional product from moving to the front of the shelf.
- Other systems include the use of a pusher system to push the product toward the front of the shelf as the product at the front of the shelf is removed. The known pusher systems are typically mounted to a track and include a pusher paddle and a coiled spring to urge the product forward. Occasionally, as the system is used, and over time, the track becomes obstructed with dirt or sticky materials that hinder the proper operation of the pusher system in the track. In addition, depending on the size, shape and weight of the product to be merchandised, the known pusher paddles may occasionally tip or bend backwards, thereby causing a binding of the pusher mechanism in the track. In those situations, the pusher mechanism may not properly push product toward the front of the shelf.
- One exemplary embodiment is directed at improving upon existing merchandising systems by providing a trackless pusher system that works with gravity-fed merchandise systems (i.e., inclined shelves or trays) and non-gravity-fed merchandise systems.
- One exemplary embodiment is directed to a product management display system for merchandising product on a shelf. This embodiment includes using a trackless pusher mechanism that travels along a surface on which product is placed. The trackless system overcomes the known problems with the use of tracks to hold and guide the known pusher mechanisms. It should be understood however that the teachings of this embodiment may be used with systems that include tracks for mounting a pusher mechanism or the like.
- The pusher mechanism can include a pusher paddle and a floor that extends forward of the pusher paddle. A flat coiled spring or other biasing element can be operatively connected behind the pusher paddle and extend across the floor of the pusher mechanism and to the front of the shelf. Alternatively, the flat coiled spring or biasing element can extend across the divider to the front of the shelf assembly. With this configuration, the pusher paddle is prevented from tipping or bending backwards during operation.
- An exemplary embodiment also includes the use of a pushing mechanism with the merchandising of product on horizontal or non-inclined shelves or surfaces, as well as with gravity-fed systems, or systems that use gravity as a mechanism to urge product toward the front of the shelf.
- In accordance with an exemplary illustrative embodiment of the invention, the pusher paddle may define a concave pushing surface for pushing cylindrical products, such as soft drink bottles or cans, and to keep the paddle centered on the track and behind the product. Alternatively, the pusher paddle may define a flat pushing surface that may further include at its upper edge a curved rib or similar structure that can also be used to push cylindrical products.
- In accordance with another exemplary illustrative embodiment of the invention, the floor of the pusher mechanism can include a notched or cut-out portion to align the pusher mechanism relative to the coiled spring. Also, the floor of the system also can include a notch or cut-out portion for receiving and mounting a flat end of the coiled spring to the floor. A spring tip may be placed on the end of the coiled spring to mount the coiled spring to the floor of the system. Alternatively, the end of the coiled spring can mount to the divider of the assembly.
- In accordance with yet another exemplary embodiment, an adaptor for a product management display system may be positioned on a floor surface of the display system. The adaptor may include a planar surface with at least two ribs extending outwardly from the planar surface and across the planar surface in a substantially parallel manner. A coiled spring may be positioned between the parallel extending ribs. With this configuration, product to be merchandised may sit on the ribs, and not directly on the coiled spring, to enhance the forward movement of certain types of product, such as cans of a beverage.
- In yet another alternative aspect, a mounting member may be used to mount the end of the coiled spring to the floor of the system. For those systems that include spaced-apart glide rails that are joined together by connecting ribs, the mounting member may be snap-fit to or otherwise mounted on the floor and between the glide rails.
- In yet another alternative aspect, the trackless pusher system is retrofitted into an existing shelf assembly. This allows for the placement of the trackless pusher system in an existing shelving system as a low cost alternative to purchasing the entire trackless pusher assembly.
- In another exemplary embodiment, the coil spring can be mounted to the retainer. An end of the coil spring can be directly mounted to the retainer or alternatively the end can be mounted to the retainer via an adapter. The adapter can have a curved portion which is received in a correspondingly shaped curved slot in the retainer to secure the end of the spring to the display assembly.
- In another exemplary embodiment, the trays can be attached via a dovetail connection to form a shelf assembly. Additionally the dividers can be adjusted such that the width of the product rows can be adapted to receive different sized products.
- In accordance with yet another exemplary embodiment, the product management display system can be arranged in a stackable arrangement. The assembly can be provided with a first tray and a second tray each having a first wall and a second wall. The first and second trays are each adapted to receive a pusher mechanism, and a retainer mechanism. First and second spacers are mounted to the first and second trays for stacking the first and second trays on top of one another. The first and second spacer can be provided with a plurality of detents, and the first tray and the second tray can each be provided with a plurality of correspondingly shaped sockets for receiving the plurality of detents.
- In accordance with yet another exemplary embodiment, a product management display system for merchandising product on a shelf includes using a trackless pusher mechanism that travels along a surface on which product is placed and one or more dividers for separating product into rows. The one or more dividers may be attached and releasably engaged to a front rail. When the one or more dividers are not engaged and held in position to the front rail, the one or more dividers and product positioned on the display system may be moved in a lateral direction, or may be lifted away from the front rail. This permits ease of replanogramming of product on the shelf. The one or more dividers may releasably engage to the front rail through the use of corresponding teeth, resilient surfaces, a locking tab, a locking bar, a cam and/or through a friction or press fit.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail. The at least one divider includes a barrier and the at least one divider further includes a divider wall. The at least one divider also includes a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor is configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes a cam coupled to the divider, wherein the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail and the cam is in the first position. The at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail and the cam is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and a plurality of dividers configured to attach to the front rail and separate product into rows. Each of the plurality of dividers includes a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail, a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor is configured to hold product, and a cam coupled to the divider, wherein the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position. Each of the plurality of dividers is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when each of the plurality of dividers is engaged with the front rail and the cam for each of the plurality of dividers is in the first position. In addition, each of the plurality of dividers is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when each of the plurality of dividers is engaged with the front rail and the cam for each of the plurality of dividers is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider including a barrier, a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail, a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider wall separates the divider floor into a first portion and a second portion and each of the first portion and the second portion are configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes a first pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the first portion, a second pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the second portion, and a cam coupled to the at least one divider, the cam configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least one divider is movable in a lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the first position, and the at least one divider resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider including a barrier configured to engage the front rail, a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to front rail, a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor configured to hold product. The display system also can include a resilient tab coupled to the divider, the resilient tab configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least one divider is fixed in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the resilient tab is in the first position. The at least one divider is movable in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the resilient tab is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail, the front rail comprising at least one first projection and at least one first recess, and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising at least one second recess and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the divider configured to move between a first position and a second position, The at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one second recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the divider is in the first position. The at least one divider (a) resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) is secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one second recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the divider is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail, the front rail including at least one first projection and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the front rail configured to move between a first position and a second position. The merchandise display system also includes at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising at least one recess. The at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the front rail is in the first position. The at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one recess of the divider and the at least one second projection of the front rail is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail, the front rail comprising a first projection and a second projection. The merchandise display system also includes at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising a recess and a third projection. The at least one of the second projection or the third projection is a movable projection that is movable between a first position and a second position. The at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first projection of the front rail is engaged with the recess of the divider and the movable projection is in the first position. The at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first projection of the front rail is engaged with the recess of the divider and the movable projection is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail, the front rail comprising at least a first engaging member. The merchandise display system also includes at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail, the at least one divider comprising a divider wall and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least one divider further comprising at least a second engaging member. The merchandise display system also includes a third engaging member configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least one divider is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first engaging member of the front rail is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider and the third engaging member is in the first position. The at least one divider is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to the front rail when the first engaging member of the front rail is engaged with the second engaging member of the divider and the third engaging member is in the second position.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail, the at least one divider including a barrier, the at least one divider further including a divider wall, the at least one divider further including a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall, wherein the divider floor is configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes a cam coupled to the divider, wherein the cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least one divider can be secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail. The cam can inhibit movement of the at least one divider in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam in in the first position and the cam can allow movement of the divider in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam is in the second position. The merchandise display system can include a handle to rotate the cam between the first position and the second position. The merchandise display system can include a handle to slide the cam between the first position and the second position.
- In another exemplary embodiment, a merchandise display system includes a front rail defining a rail groove and a divider configured to engage the front rail. The divider includes a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor extending perpendicular to the divider wall. The divider floor further includes a top surface to hold product and a bottom surface. The merchandise display system also includes a cam rotatably coupled to the divider. The cam is configured to rotate between a first position and a second position. The cam defines a cam glide that extends beneath the bottom surface of the divider floor and contacts the front rail when the cam is in the first position. In operation, the divider is movable in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam is in the first position and the cam glide contacts the front rail, and the divider is fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail when the cam is in the second position and in contact with the rail groove of the front rail. With this embodiment, the cam is at all times in contact with the front rail, regardless of whether the cam is in the first position or the second position, or in a position in-between the first and second positions.
- In an alternative aspect, the cam includes a handle to rotate the cam between the first position and the second position, and the cam can include one or more cam surfaces configured to engage one or more groove walls in the rail groove when the cam is in the second position. Additionally, the cam glide may define an elongated planar surface. Also, the merchandise display system may include a pusher mechanism having a pusher surface and a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface. A coiled spring having a coiled end may be positioned behind the pusher surface and a free end of the spring may attach the pusher mechanism to the merchandise display system. Alternatively, the barrier may be configured to receive the free end of the coiled spring. In yet another alternative aspect, the front rail may define a ridge configured to engage a groove in the divider.
- In another exemplary embodiment, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to attach to the front rail. The at least one divider may include a barrier and a divider wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail. The divider may include a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall and the divider wall separates the divider floor into a first portion and a second portion and each of the first portion and the second portion are configured to hold product. Additionally, the merchandise display system includes a first pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the first portion and a second pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the second portion. The merchandise display system includes a cam coupled to the at least one divider. The cam defines a cam glide and is configured to move between a first position and a second position. In operation, the at least one divider is movable in a lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the first position and the cam glide is in contact with the front rail, and the at least one divider resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to and along the front rail when the cam is in the second position and the cam glide is not in contact with the front rail.
- In an aspect, the first and second pusher mechanisms each include a pusher surface, a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface, and a coiled spring having a coiled end and a free end. The coiled end is positioned behind the pusher surface and the free end attaches the first and second pusher mechanisms to the merchandise display system.
- In an alternative aspect, the at least one divider may define a divider engaging member and the at least one front rail may define a front rail engaging member. The divider engaging member is configured to engage the front rail engaging member. The divider engaging member may define divider teeth on at least one surface of the divider engaging member. The front rail engaging member may define front rail teeth on at least one surface of the front rail engaging member. The divider teeth are configured to engage the front rail teeth.
- In another exemplary embodiment, a merchandise display system includes a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail. The at least one divider includes a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall. The divider floor is configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes a cam coupled to the divider. The cam is configured to move between a first position and a second position. The cam defines a cam glide for lifting the divider up off of the front rail when the cam is in the first position. The at least one divider is secured to the front rail when the cam is in the second position and the cam glide is moved away from the front rail. In an aspect, the at least one divider is movable in the plane of a shelf only in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and the at least one divider is fixed in the plane of the shelf in all directions other than the direction parallel to the front rail when the at least one divider is engaged with the front rail. In another aspect, the cam may include a handle to rotate the cam between the first position and the second position. Additionally, the cam glide may define an elongated planar surface having an edge that permits slidable movement of the cam glide relative to the front rail.
- In another exemplary embodiment, the merchandise display system may include a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail. The divider may include a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall configured to hold product. A front lock may be coupled to the divider. In an aspect, the front lock may be configured to rotate, pivot or move between a first position and a second position. When in the first position, the front lock may permit slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail. In an alternative aspect, the front lock may lift the divider up off of the front rail. When in the second position, the front lock locks the divider to the front rail and prevents slidable movement between the divider and the front rail.
- In another exemplary embodiment, the merchandise display system may include a divider secured to a support structure. The divider may include a divider wall and a divider floor. The divider wall may extend upwardly from the divider floor and the divider floor may include a top surface. The system may further include a barrier that is moveable by rotation between a folded position and an upright position without a rotation biasing element. A product positioned on a top surface of the divider floor can contact the barrier when the product moves toward the forward end of the divider and rotate the barrier from the folded position to the upright position. The barrier may be configured to cease the forward movement of the product when the barrier is in the upright position. The system may include a rotational mounting structure to which the moveable barrier is connected. The rotational mounting structure may be removably connected to the forward end of the divider.
- In another exemplary embodiment, the merchandise display system may be used in conjunction with a product tray for restocking of the system with product. The product tray may include a bottom surface, right side wall, left side wall, and an alignment flap. The alignment flap may include a proximate end, distal end, right edge, and left edge. A flap width of the alignment flap may be defined in between the right edge and the left edge. The proximate end of the alignment flap may be connected to the bottom surface of the product tray and the alignment flap may be configured such that a least a portion of the flap width is about equal to a width of product stored in the product tray. The alignment flap may be positioned in between opposing divider walls of a merchandise display system in which a product pocket is defined in between the opposing divider walls. The alignment flap aligns the product tray and the product stored in the product tray with the product pocket so that the product stored in the product tray can be slid from in the product tray into the product pocket of the merchandise display system.
-
-
Figure 1 depicts an isometric exploded view of an exemplary embodiment of a product management display system of the present invention. -
Figure 2 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary pusher mechanism mounted to an exemplary tray or product channel of the present invention. -
Figure 3 depicts another isometric view of the system ofFigure 2 with product placed in the system. -
Figure 4 depicts another isometric view of the system ofFigure 2 with multiple product placed in the system. -
Figure 5 depicts an isometric rear view of the system ofFigure 4 . -
Figure 6 depicts an alternative embodiment of the tray or product channel of the present invention. -
Figure 7 depicts an exemplary tip for an end of a coiled spring that may be used with the product management display system of the invention. -
Figure 8 depicts the exemplary tip ofFigure 7 being mounted to a surface of a tray or product channel. -
Figure 9 depicts the exemplary tip ofFigure 7 being mounted to an end of a coiled spring. -
Figure 10 depicts the exemplary tip ofFigure 7 mounted to an end of a coiled spring. -
Figure 11 depicts an isometric view of an alternative exemplary embodiment of a product management display system of the present invention. -
Figure 12 depicts another isometric view of the system ofFigure 11 . -
Figure 13 depicts a front view of the system ofFigure 11 . -
Figure 14 depicts a top view of the system ofFigure 11 . -
Figure 15 depicts a rear view of the system ofFigure 11 . -
Figure 16 depicts an isometric view of an adaptor that may be used with the invention. -
Figure 17 depicts a front view of the adaptor ofFigure 16 . -
Figure 18 depicts an exemplary installation of the adaptor of the invention. -
Figure 19 depicts an isometric view of an installed adaptor of the invention. -
Figure 20 depicts a front view of an installed adaptor of the invention. -
Figure 21 depicts an isometric view of an alternative exemplary embodiment of a product management display system of the present invention. -
Figure 22 depicts an isometric bottom view of an exemplary mounting member that may be used to mount the end of the coiled spring to the floor of the display system. -
Figure 23 depicts an isometric top view of the exemplary mounting member ofFigure 22 . -
Figure 24 depicts the exemplary mounting member ofFigure 22 mounted to the end of the coiled spring with the coiled spring mounted to an exemplary pusher paddle. -
Figure 25 depicts another view of the exemplary mounting member ofFigure 22 mounted to the end of the coiled spring with the coiled spring mounted to an exemplary pusher paddle. -
Figure 26 depicts the exemplary mounting member ofFigure 22 with attached coiled spring being mounted to the floor of the system. -
Figure 27 depicts the exemplary mounting member ofFigure 22 installed on the floor of the system. -
Figure 28 depicts an isometric view of an alternative exemplary embodiment of a product management display system of the present invention. -
Figure 29 depicts a close-up isometric view of the tray of the exemplary embodiment ofFigure 28 . -
Figure 29A depicts a cross-sectional view of the exemplary embodiment ofFigure 28 illustrating a first securing method. -
Figure 29B depicts a cross-sectional view of the exemplary embodiment ofFigure 28 illustrating a second securing method. -
Figure 30 depicts a close-up isometric view of the embodiment ofFigure 28 illustrating a rivet attaching the spring to the tray. -
Figure 31 depicts an isometric view of the embodiment ofFigure 28 being assembled in a preexisting wire shelf. -
Figure 32 depicts an isometric view of the embodiment ofFigure 28 assembled in a preexisting wire shelf. -
Figure 33 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 34 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 35 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of an adapter. -
Figure 36 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of a retainer. -
Figure 37 depicts a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 38 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 39 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 40 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 41A depicts a sectional side view of an exemplary embodiment of a divider. -
Figure 41B depicts a front view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 41C depicts a close up view of a section ofFigure 41B . -
Figure 41D depicts a front view of an exemplary embodiment of a divider. -
Figure 42 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 43 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the display system. -
Figure 44 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of a product management display system. -
Figure 45 depicts another isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of a product management display system with product in the system. -
Figure 46 depicts a top view of another exemplary embodiment of a product management display system with product in the system. -
Figure 47 depicts an isometric-rear view of an exemplary embodiment of a product management display system with product in the system. -
Figure 48 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary embodiment of the pusher mechanism mounted to a divider. -
Figure 49 depicts another isometric view of the divider and pusher mechanism being assembled to the product management display system. -
Figure 50 depicts an isometric view of yet another exemplary embodiment of the product management display system. -
Figure 51 depicts another isometric view of the exemplary embodiment of the product management display system ofFigure 50 without product. -
Figure 52 depicts an exploded isometric view of the exemplary embodiment of the product management display system ofFigure 50 . -
Figure 53 depicts an isometric view of yet another exemplary embodiment of the product management display system. -
Figure 54 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary attachment of the pusher spring to a shelf of the product management display system ofFigure 53 . -
Figure 55 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary attachment of the pusher spring to a shelf of the product management display system ofFigure 53 . -
Figure 56 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary attachment of the pusher spring to a shelf of the product management display system ofFigure 53 . -
Figure 57 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary attachment of the pusher spring to a shelf of the product management display system ofFigure 53 . -
Figure 58 depicts an isomeric view of an exemplary embodiment of the product management display system in accordance with one or more aspect of the disclosure. -
Figure 59 depicts an isometric view of the exemplary product management display system ofFigure 58 . -
Figure 60 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary pusher mechanism in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 61 depicts a partial isometric view of an exemplary divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 62 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary divider and pusher mechanism in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 63 depicts a partial isometric view of an exemplary front portion of a divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 64 depicts a partial isometric view of an exemplary front portion of a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 65 depicts a partial isometric view of an exemplary connection between a divider and a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 66 depicts a side view of an exemplary divider and front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 67A-67C depict side views of an exemplary divider attaching to a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 68A-68C depict side views of an exemplary divider attaching to a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 69A depicts an isometric view of exemplary rail mounting clips for a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 69B depicts an isometric view of an exemplary front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 70 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary front rail and rail mounting clips in accordance with accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 71 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 72 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary divider and pusher mechanism in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 73 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary divider and pusher mechanism in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 74 depicts a partial isometric view of an exemplary divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 75 depicts a partial isometric view of an exemplary front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 76A and 76B depict partial isometric views of an exemplary front rail and a cam bar lever in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 77 depicts a front exploded view of an exemplary product management display system in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 78 depicts a back exploded view of an exemplary product management display system in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 79A-79C depict side views of an exemplary front rail and divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 80 depicts an isometric view of an exemplary product management display system in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 81A-81B depict partial side views of an exemplary front rail and divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 82A-82C depict partial side views of an exemplary front rail and divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 83A-83C depict partial side views of an exemplary front rail and divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 84A-84F depict isometric views of an exemplary product management display system in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 85 depicts a side view of an exemplary divider and front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 86A-86L depict views of components of an exemplary product management display system in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 87A-87C depict side views of exemplary dividers and front rails in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 88A and 88B depict isometric views of an exemplary divider in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 89A-89C depict side views of an exemplary divider attaching to a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 90A-90F depict views of an exemplary divider attaching to a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 91A depicts a view of an exemplary divider and a rear rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 92 depicts an exploded view of an exemplary divider and rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 93A and93B depict views of an exemplary divider mounting to a front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figures 94A-94C depict cross-section views of the movement of an exemplary cam used with a divider and front rail in accordance with one or more aspects of the disclosure. -
Figure 95 depicts a top, right perspective view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figures 96A and 96B are top, right perspective views of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 97 is a top, right perspective exploded view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figures 98A-98C are side views of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figures 99A-99C are side views of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figures 100A-100D are a top, left perspective views of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 101A is a top, right perspective view of aspects of an example product tray. -
Figure 101B is a top view of aspects of an example product tray. -
Figures 101C-101F are top, left perspective views of aspects of an example product tray used in conjunction with example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 102A is a top, right perspective view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 102B is a top, right perspective exploded view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figures 102C and 102D are side views of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 103A is a top, front, right perspective view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 103B is a top, rear, right perspective view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 103C is a rear view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 103D is a top view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 103E is a right side view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104A is a top, right perspective exploded view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104B is a top, right perspective view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104C is a bottom, right perspective view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104D is a front view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104E is a top view of aspects of example components of a rotational mounting structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104F is a left side view of aspects of example components of a rotational mount structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 104G is a bottom view of aspects of example components of a rotational mount structure of a merchandise display system. -
Figures 105A-105D are side views of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 106A is a top, right perspective exploded view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. -
Figure 106B is a side view of aspects of example components of a merchandise display system. - Before the embodiments of the invention are explained in detail, it is to be understood that the invention is not limited in its application to the details of construction and the arrangement of the components set forth in the following description or illustrated in the drawings. The invention is capable of other embodiments and of being practiced or being carried out in various ways. Also, it is to be understood that the phraseology and terminology used herein are for the purpose of description and should not be regarded as limiting. The use of "including" and "comprising" and variations thereof is meant to encompass the items listed thereafter and equivalents thereof as well as additional items and equivalents thereof. Further, the use of the term "mount," "mounted" or "mounting" is meant to broadly include any technique or method of mounting, attaching, joining or coupling one part to another, whether directly or indirectly.
- The invention may be embodied in various forms. Referring to the Figures wherein like numerals indicate like elements, there is depicted in
Figure 1 an isometric exploded view of an exemplary embodiment.Exemplary merchandise system 10 includes aproduct dispensing tray 12 in which is mounted an exemplarytrackless pusher mechanism 14. As described in more detail below, thepusher mechanism 14 will fit in thetray 12 and will slide along the surface of the tray without the use of tracks, rails, or guides typically used to hold a conventional pusher mechanism to the tray or floor of the tray. The pusher mechanism defines a pusher paddle and a pusher floor that extends forward of the pusher paddle. A coiled spring may extend across the pusher floor and operatively connect to the tray at a forward position on the tray. In one aspect of the invention, product to be merchandised may be placed in the tray in front of the pusher paddle and may sit on the pusher floor as well as the coiled spring. With this configuration, the weight of the product will prevent the pusher paddle from tipping to ensure proper pushing of the product. In addition, the problems associated with debris or sticky materials hindering the effectiveness of known pusher systems that use tracks, rails or guides have been eliminated. Other aspects, embodiments and features of the invention and its teachings are set forth in more detail below. - The
exemplary tray 12 may define asurface 16 and one or more dividing panels ordividers 18 to separate the tray into numerous rows for placement of product. In an alternative aspect, thetray 12 may be a shelf or any other surface on which products may be placed for merchandising. Thesurface 16 may be a solid surface or a surface defining a plurality of spaced-apart apertures 20 separated by a plurality ofsupport ribs 22. Theapertures 20 andribs 22 provide a surface that permits the slidable movement of product placed on this surface and also permits liquids and dirt to pass through theapertures 20 so that they do not collect on thesurface 16. Thesurface 16 may be made of any suitable material that permits the slidable movement of product on thesurface 16. Other surface or floor configurations are known and may be used with the principles of the invention. - As depicted in
Figures 9 and 10 , thesurface 16 may define arounded end portion 24 that includes a notch or cut-out portion 26. Theend portion 24 may be rounded to match the shape of the product that is placed on the tray. For example, the depictedend portion 24 is rounded or defines a semi-circular shape to match the contour of a bottle or can that may be placed in the tray and on theend portion 24. Other shapes of the end portion may be used with the invention depending on the product to be merchandised. - The notch 26 may be used to receive and mount an
end 29 of acoiled spring 30 or similar biasing element. The notch 26 may define opposing angled edge surfaces 32 that are joined byedge 34. Theedge 34 is preferably centered across the width of the product row formed in thetray 12 and extends perpendicular to the length of the tray. This configuration will center thecoiled spring 30 relative to thetray 12 and will permit the spring to extend in a substantially parallel manner relative to the length of the tray. In other words, the depictededge 34 of the notch 26 will permit thespring 30 to extend along the length of thetray 12 at or near the center of the product row formed by the tray. One skilled in the art will appreciate that the location and configuration of the notch may vary depending on the desired placement of the spring. - The
coiled spring 30 may define anend 29 that is configured to be placed across the notch 26 and onto theedge 34. In one aspect, theend 29 of the coiled spring may be V-shaped and function as a hook such that theend 29 will wrap around theedge 34 with a portion of theend 29 of the coiled spring extending beneath theend portion 24 of thesurface 16. This configuration permits an easy installation of the coiled spring onto the tray. - In another aspect, and referring to
Figure 7 , aspring tip 60 may be added to theend 29 of thespring 30 to assist with the mounting of the spring to the system. Thespring tip 60 may define numerous shapes and configurations depending on the configuration of the tray and the surface on which the spring end needs to attach. Thespring tip 60 may be permanently attached to theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 or it may be detachable to permit the interchange or replacement of thespring tip 60. Thespring tip 60 may be made of plastic and may define one or more apertures. Aperture 61 may be used to receive theend 29 of the coiledspring 30. Asecond aperture 63 may be used to receive a mating tongue or mountingmember 65 extending from thesurface 16 of thetray 12, as discussed below. With this configuration, theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 may be operatively connected to thetray 12. - In another aspect, the
end 29 of the coiled spring may snap-fit into an aperture formed in thesurface 16, or may be otherwise inserted and secured to an aperture or opening in the tray, thereby securing theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 in position. - Referring back to
Figure 1 ,dividers 18 may also be used to separate product into rows. Thedividers 18 extend substantially upwardly from thesurface 16 and as illustrated inFigure 1 , may be positioned on opposing sides of thesurface 16. Alternatively, thedividers 18 may be positioned at any desired position on thetray 12 or to thesurface 16. Thedividers 18 may be formed as a unitary structure with thesurface 16, or thedividers 18 may be detachable to provide added flexibility with the system. The dividers may be attached to a front or back rail depending on the system. Thedividers 18 may define numerous configurations and may extend upwardly any desired distance to provide the desired height of the dividers between the rows of product to be merchandised. This height may be adjustable by adding divider extenders or the like. - Located at the front of the
tray 12 and extending between thedividers 18 may be one or more product-retainingmembers 44. The product-retainingmembers 44 serve as a front retaining wall or bar to hold the product in thetray 12 and to prevent the product from falling out of thetray 12. These members are also configured to permit the easy removal of the forward-most product positioned in thetray 12. The product-retainingmember 44 may be one or more curve-shaped retaining ribs as depicted inFigure 1 . These illustrated retaining ribs may extend from one divider to another divider thereby joining the dividers. The retaining ribs may also extend part-way between the dividers, as also shown inFigure 1 asrib 46, to also assist in retaining the product in the tray. Alternatively, and as shown inFigure 6 the product-retainingmember 44 may be a curve-shapedsolid retaining wall 48 that extends between dividers. The retainingwall 48 may be transparent or semi-transparent to permit visualization of the product on the shelf. In another aspect, the retainingwall 48 may also extend part-way between thedividers 18. In yet another embodiment depicted inFigures 11-15 , the retainingwall 100 may be attached to the surface of the tray and not connect to the dividers. In this embodiment, the retainingwall 100 may form anopening 102 defined by anupper member 104, opposing,curved side walls 106 that further define anangled edge 108, and afloor member 110. Theside walls 106 may also be straight and not curved depending on the system. The end of the coiled spring may also snap-fit into thefloor 110 or otherwise attached to the tray using any of the techniques described herein. One of skill in the art will readily appreciate that there are numerous shapes and configurations possible for the product-retainingmember 44 and that the depicted configurations are merely exemplary embodiments of these numerous configurations. - Referring back to
Figure 1 , the exemplarytrackless pusher mechanism 14 defines apusher paddle 50 and apusher floor 52. Thepusher paddle 50 andpusher floor 52 may be formed as a single, unitary structure or may be separate structures that are joined together using known techniques. In addition, thepusher paddle 50 andpusher floor 52 may be made of any known suitable plastic or metal material. The pusher paddle and pusher floor may be reinforced using any known reinforcing techniques. - In one aspect, the
pusher paddle 50 forms a curved-shape pusher surface or face 54 that is configured to match the shape of the product to be merchandised, such as plastic bottles or cans containing a beverage, as depicted inFigures 3-5 . The curve-shaped pusher surface 54 permits the pusher to remain centrally aligned with the last product in the tray. This configuration reduces friction and drag between the pusher and the divider walls. In an alternative aspect, the pusher surface or face may be a flat surface. In yet another aspect, the flat pusher surface may be accompanied by a curved shaped rib that is positioned near or on the top of the pusher paddle and that may be used to center and align product in the tray, in a manner similar to the curve-shaped pusher surface 54 depicted inFigure 1 . The curve shaped rib may define other shapes and configurations that permit cylindrical or similar shaped products to be properly pushed in the tray. Advertisement, product identification or other product information may be placed on the pusher surface 54. - Positioned behind the pusher surface or face 54 may be one or
more support members 58, such as ribs, walls, or gussets. Thesupport members 58 are configured to support the pusher surface 54 and further connect thepusher paddle 50 to thepusher floor 52. As can be seen inFigure 5 , positioned between thesupport members 58 is the coiledspring 30, and more specifically thecoiled end 57 that is used to urge thepusher paddle 50 forward and along thetray 12, as understood in the art. Any technique used to operatively connect the coiled spring to thepusher paddle 50 may be used with the invention. - As shown in
Figure 1 , thepusher floor 52 may be positioned below thepusher paddle 50 and may extend forward of the pusher surface 54 of the pusher paddle. Thepusher floor 52 may extend any predetermined distance and at any predetermined angle. For example, thepusher floor 52 may extend substantially perpendicular to the pusher surface 54. In the exemplary embodiment, thepusher floor 52 may extend a sufficient distance to permit one product, such as a single bottle or can, to be placed on the pusher floor. In another aspect, thepusher floor 52 may be configured to permit more than one product to be placed on the pusher floor. Thepusher floor 52 may define any shape, including the depicted round shape and may define any product retaining features on the surface of the pusher floor, such as ribs, walls, or the like, to further hold the product on the pusher floor. - As can be seen in
Figure 2 , thepusher floor 52 may define an elongated channel, groove or recessedportion 59 that is sized, shaped and configured to seat thecoiled spring 30. In the exemplary embodiment, the channel or groove 59 may extend across thefloor 52 and in a substantially perpendicular manner relative to thepusher paddle 50. In an alternative aspect, the groove or channel may extend part-way or across theentire pusher floor 52, as shown inFigure 19 . Such configuration permits the proper alignment and positioning of thepusher paddle 50 in the tray. Thegroove 59 may define a depth that matches or exceeds the thickness of the coiledspring 30. With this configuration, thecoiled spring 30 will seat at or below the pusher floor surface such that product will not sit directly on the coiled spring, rather, such product will sit on the pusher floor surface. As shown inFigure 19 , the pusher floor may include apertures and openings through which debris or other items may pass. Alternatively, the floor may be a solid surface. - In an alternative aspect of the invention, as shown in
Figures 16-20 , anadaptor 180 may be positioned on thesurface 16. Referring toFigures 16 and 17 , theadaptor 180 may include one or more raisedribs 182 on which a product may sit. The raisedribs 182 may extend longitudinally along the length of theadaptor 180. Theadaptor 180 may be a flat extrusion of plastic material (or any other suitable material) defining aplanar surface 184 with the one ormore ribs 182 extending outwardly from theplanar surface 184. Theadaptor 180 may define arounded end 185 and include a notch or cut-awayportion 186 through which or across which the coiled spring may extend. Therounded end 185 may be configured to match the shape of the product that is placed on the tray. Other shapes of theend 185,notch 186 andadaptor 180 may be used with the invention depending on the product to be merchandised. Theadaptor 180 may be a separate, insertable piece or, alternatively, a piece formed integral with thesurface 16. - Referring to
Figure 18 , theadaptor 180 may be easily insertable onto thesurface 16 and between thedividers 18. Referring toFigure 19 , once theadaptor 180 is installed, thepusher mechanism 14 may be positioned on top of theadaptor 180 and may slide freely across theribs 182 of theadaptor 180. Thecoiled spring 30 may extend in a parallel manner between theribs 182 and may seat at or below the top surface of theribs 182, as more clearly shown inFigure 20 . With this configuration, the product to be merchandised may sit on, and slide along, theribs 182 and not on thecoiled spring 30. - In an alternative aspect, the
ribs 182 may be a raised bead or raised beads, or a series of fingers that may be used to facilitate the movement of the product on thesurface 16. In yet another alternative embodiment, theribs 182 may be product moving members, such as runners or one or more rollers or rolling members that permit the product to roll across the rolling members and toward the front of the product display system. Exemplary roller assemblies include those disclosed and described in United States Application Serial No.11/257,718 filed October 25, 2005 - The underneath side of the
pusher floor 52 may be a smooth planar surface that will slide freely along thesurface 16. Alternatively, and similar to above, thepusher floor 52 may include beads, runners, rollers or the like that will permit the pusher floor to slide along the surface yet raise the pusher floor up off of thesurface 16. In another alternative embodiment, the underneath side of the pusher floor may be configured with rail mounting members to permit the mounting of the pusher to a track or rail, as understood in the art. - The pusher floor further defines a notch or cut-out
portion 62 through which will pass thecoiled spring 30. Theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 will pass through thenotch 62 and through the notch 26 of thesurface 16 and will mount to the tray using any of the techniques described above. - In use, as the
pusher mechanism 14 is urged rearward in thetray 12, theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 will be held in position as described above and thecoiled end 57 of thespring 30 will begin to uncoil behind thepusher paddle 50. If thepusher 14 is allowed to move forward in thetray 14, such as when product is removed from the front of the tray, thecoiled end 57 of thespring 30 will coil and force thepusher paddle 50 forward in thetray 12, thereby urging product toward the front of the tray. - In an alternative embodiment, the
coiled spring 30 may extend below and underneath thepusher floor 52 as opposed to above and across the pusher floor, as depicted in the Figures. With this configuration, thegroove 59 and notch 62 may not be necessary. - The
coiled spring 30 may be any biasing element including, without limitation, a flat coil spring commonly used with pusher systems. The present invention may use one or more coiled springs to urge thepusher mechanism 14 forward depending on the desired application. The coil tension of thespring 30 may also vary depending on the particular application. - Referring to
Figure 2 , thetrackless pusher mechanism 14 is shown mounted to thetray 12. As illustrated, thepusher mechanism 14 fits in thetray 12 between thedividers 18.End 29 of the coiledspring 30 extends through the notch in the pusher floor and mounts to the tray as described above. In use, thepusher mechanism 14 will slide along thesurface 16 of thetray 12 without the use of tracks, rails, or guides. As depicted inFigure 2 , thepusher mechanism 14 is shown in a forward position. - Referring to
Figure 3 , thepusher mechanism 14 is shown merchandising oneproduct 70 in themerchandise system 10. The product is prevented from tipping out of the tray by the product-retainingmember 44. Theproduct 70 may be any product to be merchandised including the depicted soft drink bottle. As shown in this Figure, theproduct 70 sits on thepusher floor 52 and thecoiled spring 30 that extends below the product. The weight of the product on thefloor 52 and the positioning of the product across thespring 30 prevent thepaddle 50 from tipping in thetray 12. - Referring to
Figure 4 , thepusher mechanism 14 is shown merchandisingmultiple products 70 in themerchandise system 10. As shown in this Figure, the product next to thepusher paddle 50 sits on thepusher floor 52 and thecoiled spring 30 that extends below the product. The other products will sit on thecoiled spring 30 that will extend below these products. Alternatively, theadaptor 180 may be positioned in the system in which case the product may sit on theribs 182 of the adaptor as opposed to the coiled spring. Again, the weight of the product on thepusher floor 52 and the positioning of the products across thespring 30 prevent thepaddle 50 from tipping in the tray. In use, as one product is removed from the front of the tray near the product-retainingmember 44, the pusher mechanism 14 (through the urging of the coiled spring 30) will push the remaining product forward in thetray 12 until the forward-most product contacts the product-retainingmember 44. As additional products are removed, thepusher mechanism 14 will continue to push the remaining product toward the product-retainingmember 44. - Referring to
Figure 5 , a rear view of thepusher mechanism 14 shows thepusher mechanism 14 merchandisingmultiple products 70 in themerchandise system 10. Again, the product next to thepusher paddle 50 sits on thepusher floor 52 and thecoiled spring 30 that extends below the product. The other products will sit on the coiled spring that will extend below these products. Alternatively, theadaptor 180 may be positioned in the system in which case the product may sit on theribs 182 of the adaptor as opposed to the coiled spring. As one product is removed from the front of the tray near the product-retainingmember 44, thecoiled end 57 of thespring 30 will urge thepusher paddle 50 of thepusher mechanism 14 forward in thetray 12 until the forward-most product contacts the product-retainingmember 44. As can be seen in this Figure, thecoiled end 57 may be positioned between twosupport members 58. The support members will retain the coiled spring between these members. As can be seen in this Figure, thepusher floor 52 may also extend below thesupport members 58. - Referring to
Figure 6 , an alternative embodiment of the pusher tray is depicted. With this embodiment,multiple trays 12 may be formed into a singlemulti-tray assembly 80. The multi-trays may have a common floor withdividers 18 extending upwardly from the floor to create the multiple trays or rows. In this embodiment, the product-retainingmember 44 may be a solid member that extends between two dividers, as discussed above. One or more of themulti-tray assemblies 80 may be coupled or joined together in a side-by-side manner using any known technique, including clips, dovetailing, fasteners, or the like. With this configuration, numerous rows of product can be provided for the merchandising of numerous products. - As stated above, the
trackless pusher mechanism 14 may be used with gravity-fed systems, that is, systems having trays or product channels that are mounted on an incline to permit gravity to assist with the merchandising of the product. Alternatively, thetrackless pusher mechanism 14 may be used with systems that are mounted in a non-inclined or in a horizontal manner where gravity will provide little or no assistance with the merchandising of the product. Thetrackless pusher mechanism 14 may also be used to push various shaped products. -
Figure 7 depicts anexemplary tip 60 for theend 29 of acoiled spring 30 that may be used with themerchandise system 10. As illustrated, thetip 60 defines an aperture 61 for receiving theend 29 of the coiled spring and anaperture 63 for mounting to thesurface 16 of the tray. As can be seen inFigure 7 , in one aspect of an alternative embodiment, extending beneath thesurface 16 may be a tongue or mountingmember 65 that may be configured to mate with theaperture 63 and to snap-fit thetip 60 onto thetongue 65 and thus to thesurface 16. - Referring to
Figure 8 , theexemplary tip 60 ofFigure 7 is shown being mounted to the tongue or mountingmember 65. Thetongue 65 may include an elongated outwardly extendingrib 67 that is used to snap-fit thetip 60 onto thetongue 65. One skilled in the art will appreciate that other techniques may be used to mount thetip 60 to thesurface 16 and that the depicted technique is merely an exemplary embodiment of one such technique. - Referring to
Figure 9 , theexemplary tip 60 is shown fully mounted in a snap-fit manner to thesurface 16, and more specifically to theend portion 24 of thesurface 16 of thetray 12. Also depicted is the mounting of theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 to the aperture 61 of thetip 60. As shown inFigure 9 , theend 29 of the coiled spring may be inserted into the aperture 61. The aperture 61 is configured to receive theend 29 of the coiled spring and hold theend 29 in position, and to also permit the removal of theend 29 of the coiled spring from the aperture 61 in those circumstances where it is desirable to disconnect the coiled spring from the tip to permit the removal of thepusher mechanism 14 from the system. - Referring to
Figure 10 there is shown theend 29 of the coiled spring fully mounted to theexemplary tip 60. As illustrated in this figure, thecoiled spring 30 is now operatively connected to thesurface 16 of thetray 12. As a result, thepusher mechanism 14 is now mounted to thetray 12. - Referring to
Figures 21-27 there is shown an alternative technique for mounting theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 to the merchandise display system. A mountingmember 130 may be used to mount theend 29 of the coiled spring to thefloor 131 of the system. For those systems that include spaced-apart glide rails 132 that are joined together by connecting ribs 134 (Figures 26 and 27 ), the mountingmember 130 may be snap-fit to or otherwise mounted on thefloor 131 and between the glide rails 132. The mounting member will thus hold the end of the coiled spring in position and to the floor of the system. - Referring to
Figures 22 and 23 , the mountingmember 130 may include one ormore legs 136 on one or more sides of themember 130. The legs may be configured to snap-fit to the underside of therails 132 to thereby hold the mountingmember 130 to the floor of the system. Thelegs 136 may include legs ends 137 defining an L-shape or angled surfaces that are configured to contact the underside of therail 132 and prevent the mountingmember 130 from being lifted up from the floor, except by the intentional flexing of the legs out from the underside of therail 132. Thelegs 136 may contact the connectingribs 134 which will prevent slidable movement of the mountingmember 130 relative to the floor. Referring toFigure 26 , the mountingmember 130 is shown being mounted to the floor of the system and more specifically to the rails.Figure 27 illustrates that the mountingmember 130 remains in position as thepusher paddle 141 is pulled away from the front of the system. The mountingmember 130 may be connected to this type ofsystem floor 131 using other techniques. For example, a separate mounting clip, one or more fasteners, adhesives, or other techniques may be used to secure the mountingmember 130 to thefloor 131. - Referring to
Figures 22 and 23 , the mountingmember 130 may also include an aperture or opening or slot 138 that will receive theend 29 of the spring. The spring may be mounted using any of the techniques described herein, or other techniques. The configuration of theaperture 138 and mountingmember 130 will hold the spring in position on the mountingmember 130, similar to the technique described above. - The mounting
member 130 may also includeglide ribs 139 on a top surface that allow product placed thereon to slide more easily across the mounting member after the mounting member is installed to the floor of the system. The mountingmember 130 may also include an elongatedflat body 140 that extends forward of the location of thelegs 136 to provide stability to the mountingmember 130 after it is mounted to the floor of the system. - Referring to
Figures 24, 25 and27 , the pusher paddle orpusher mechanism 141 may include apusher face 143 configured to match the shape of the product against which it pushes. As illustrated, thepusher face 143 may be curve shaped to match the shape of a bottle or other cylindrical object. Thepusher paddle 141 may also include apusher floor 145 similar to the pusher floor configurations described above. Thepusher floor 145 may further include aspring sleeve 147 that receives the coiledspring 30 to shield and protect the spring. Thespring sleeve 147 may extend partly or fully across thepusher floor 145 and in the direction of thespring 30. Thespring sleeve 147 may have a relatively short height and a flat surface 149 to permit product to sit thereon without significant tipping or leaning of the product. - The
pusher paddle 141 may be positioned on top of thefloor 131 to glide on top of the surface, as described above. The pusher paddle may be positioned between twoproduct divider walls 153 that are joined together by aproduct retaining member 155. Additionalproduct retaining members 157 may extend outwardly from the product dividers. - Referring to
Figures 28 and 29 there is shown yet another alternative technique for mounting theend 29 of the coiledspring 30 to the merchandise display system. In this embodiment, theend 29 is riveted to thetray 216. - Referring to
Figures 28-32 in an alternative embodiment, the trackless pusher system may be retrofitted to an existingshelf assembly 230, which may have product dividers already built in. For example, in one embodiment, the trackless pusher system may be retrofitted to an existing wire shelf assembly. Referring toFigures 30-32 , a tray oradaptor 216 may have aglide floor 222 that may be sized to a single lane of theshelf 234 or sized to an entire shelf width. Theglide floor 222 may include several raisedribs 224, which help to reduce friction for the products merchandised on thetray 216. It should be understood that one or more raisedribs 224 may be used with theglide floor 222. Alternatively, theglide floor 222 may be a flat, planar surface without raised ribs. The tray oradaptor 216 may be configured similar to theadaptor 180 ofFigure 16 . - As shown in
Figures 28 and 30 , theend 29 of coiledspring 30 may be riveted, via arivet 229, to thefront end 228 of thetray 216, or may be attached by any other attachment technique. Thetray 216 can be retained to the shelf by any attachment technique suitable for the particular shelf. In one embodiment, and as illustrated inFigures 29-32 , thetray 216 may include one or more outwardly extending fingers or snaps 220, which may engage one or moreindividual wires 232 of theshelf 234 to retain thetray 216 on theshelf 234. The fingers or snaps 220 may extend longitudinally along the length of thetray 216, or may be spaced apart along the length of the tray. Thesnaps 220 may be used to snap-fit thetray 216 to the existing wire shelf. As depicted inFigures 29A and 29B , thesnaps 220A and 220B may define numerous configurations that permit thetray 216 to be snap fit to the shelf. The embodiment depicted inFigures 28-32 allows for the placement of the trackless pusher system in an existing shelving system, such as a wire shelf system, as a low cost alternative to the entire trackless pusher assembly. It should be understood that with this embodiment, any pusher mechanism described herein may be used. - As depicted in
Figures 33 and44 , in another exemplary embodiment, the display management system comprises one ormore pusher mechanisms 286, one ormore dividers 266, one ormore trays 306, and one or more retainers 250. Thepusher mechanisms 286 can be formed of apusher paddle 287 and apusher floor 288. Product is placed on thepusher floor 288 and guided to the front of the display management system via thedividers 266 and thepusher paddle 287. Thecoiled spring 30 biases thepusher mechanism 286 toward theretainer 250 such that product moves to the front of the system. - In one exemplary embodiment, depicted in
Figure 33 , thecoiled spring 30 can be mounted to theretainer 250. Alternatively, thecoiled spring 30 can be mounted to a divider 266 (also shown inFigures 48 and49 ). Thecoiled spring 30 can be directly mounted to theretainer 250, as depicted inFigure 33 , or can be mounted to theretainer 250 via aseparate adapter 252, as depicted inFigure 34 . - As depicted in
Figure 35 , theadapter 252 has a wall 254 proximate afirst end 256. Thefirst end 256 has acurved portion 262, which curves upwardly. The middle portion of theadapter 252 may be provided with acurved slot 260, which is adapted to receive a correspondingly shaped spring end (not shown). - The
coiled spring 30 at one end can be secured to the middle portion of theadapter 252. In an exemplary embodiment, thecurved slot 260 corresponds in shape and size of the first spring end. Additionally, the first spring end of the coiledspring 30 can be crimped or bent to provide for additional fastening. Nevertheless, any sufficient fastening method can be used to fix the first spring end of the coiledspring 30 to theadapter 252. - In an exemplary embodiment, shown in
Figures 36 and37 , theretainer 250 has acurved slot 284 corresponding in shape and size to thecurved portion 262 of theadapter 252. Thecurved slot 284 extends the length of the retainer to allow for unlimited positioning of theadapter 252 along the length of theretainer 250. - To secure the first spring end of the coiled
spring 30 to theretainer 250, thecurved portion 262 of theadapter 252 is placed into thecurved slot 284 of theretainer 250. Thecurved slot 284 secures theadapter 252 and the first spring end of the coiledspring 30 to theretainer 250 and provides for a quick and easy assembly of the display system. The wall 254 provides additional stability in the connection between theretainer 250 and theadapter 252. Other methods, however, can be used to secure theadapter 252 and/or the first spring end of the coiledspring 30 to theretainer 250. - Alternatively, as depicted in
Figures 33 and44 the coiledspring 30 of thepusher paddle 287 can be mounted directly to the front of thetray 306. Thefirst spring end 290 of the coiledspring 30 is provided with a curved portion. The curved portion curves downwardly from thepusher floor 288 and is adapted to be received in a recess 316 (shown inFigure 33 ) defined by alip 318 of the front surface of the dispensingtray 306 and theretainer 250. A vertically oriented surface of theretainer 250 and thelip 318 are spaced such that a gap is formed between the vertically oriented surface and a front edge of thelip 250. To secure thecoiled spring 30 and thepusher mechanism 286 to the assembly, thefirst spring end 290 is inserted into the gap formed between the vertically oriented surface of theretainer 250 and the front edge of thelip 318 and placed into therecess 316 formed by thelip 318 of the dispensingtray 306 and theretainer 250. - In another exemplary embodiment depicted in
Figures 38, 39 ,48 and49 , thecoiled spring 30 can be directly mounted to adivider 266. In addition, in this exemplary embodiment thecoiled spring 30 can be mounted perpendicular to thepusher floor 288 such that the axis, about which the coiledspring 30 is coiled, is perpendicular to thepusher floor 288. This orientation has the benefit of preventing the pusher paddle from tipping back. Thefirst spring end 290 can be provided with an angled portion 292 and atip portion 296. In one exemplary embodiment, the angled portion 292 can be bent perpendicular to thecoiled spring body 294. The divider can be provided with aslot 298, which is adapted to receive thetip portion 296 of thefirst spring end 290. - To secure the coiled spring to the divider, the
tip portion 296 is inserted into theslot 298. Once thetip portion 296 is fully inserted into theslot 298, the angled portion 292 engages theslot 298 so as to secure thefirst spring end 290 to thedivider 266. - As depicted in
Figure 33 , various pusher mechanism designs can be implemented. Thepusher paddle 287 can be formed flat to accommodate correspondingly shaped product. Alternatively, thepusher paddle 286 can have a curved first end and a flat second end. This serves to accommodate a variety of cylindrical products having a variety of different sized diameters and to facilitate the operation of thepusher mechanism 286. During operation, the product in thepusher mechanism 286 and the curved first end together force the pusher mechanism against thedivider 266, such that thecoil spring 30 remains flat against thedivider 266 holding thefirst spring end 290, while in tension or in operation. This allows for a smoother operation of the pusher mechanism and ensures that the product is properly dispensed as users remove the product from the system. - In another exemplary embodiment depicted in
Figures 40-41D , the distance between thedividers 266 can be adjusted to accommodate different sized containers. Thedividers 266 can be provided with connectingportions 272. The connectingportions 272 can be provided with a first elongatedangled surface 268 and a second elongatedangled surface 270. Additionally, the connectingportions 272 can be provided with a plurality ofprojections 274. As depicted inFigure 41B , the rails can be formed ofteeth 278 having face surfaces 280 and flank surfaces 282. - When assembled, as depicted in
Figure 41C , the connectingportions 272 are received between theteeth 278 of the rails. Additionally, the elongatedangled surfaces projections 274 are wedged between theteeth 278. Also as shown inFigure 41C , the elongatedangled surfaces projections 274 engage the lower surfaces of theteeth 278. Flank surfaces 282 contact the connectingportion 272. - In an exemplary embodiment depicted in
Figure 42 , thetrays 306 are provided with dovetail connections. Afirst side 308 of thetrays 306 is provided withtongues 312 adapted to fit withingrooves 314 located on asecond side 310 of thetrays 306. To connect the trays, thegrooves 314 are aligned withtongues 312 such that thetongues 312 are firmly secured within thegrooves 314. - In an exemplary embodiment depicted in
Figure 43 , thetrays 306 are configured to receive theretainer 250 at a front end. The retainer can be provided withrectangular holes 300, and the retainer is provided with correspondingly shaped and sized projections 302. To secure theretainer 250 to thetray 306, the projections 302 fit intoholes 300 to lock the retainer into place on thetray 306. - As depicted in
Figures 45-47 , after the product management display system is assembled, product is loaded into the system. By adjusting the dividers 266 a wide variety of product sizes and shapes can be loaded into the system. As shown inFigures 46 and 47 , thecoil spring 30 in conjunction with thepusher paddle 287 push the product toward theretainer 250. As a user takes product out of the system, thepusher paddle 287 pushes the remaining product such that the product slides along thefloor 264 to theretainer 250. This assures that all product remains at the front of the display system. - As depicted in
Figures 50-52 , the productmanagement display system 400 can be arranged such thattrays first tray 402, asecond tray 404, afirst spacer 406, and asecond spacer 408. - The
trays first tray 402 and thesecond tray 404 can be each provided with aclear retainer 410, apusher mechanism 412, first and second guiding walls, and a coil spring 414. - The pusher mechanism 414 is arranged in a similar fashion as the embodiments discussed above, such that it slides product along the surface of the
trays - To provide for an easy assembly and disassembly, the stackable product management display system can be provided with a dovetail connection or any other suitable connection, such as a snap-fit connection, screw-thread connection, or a rivet connection. The first and second trays are provided with
detents 416 for assembling the first andsecond spacers second trays second trays sockets 418 on their respective outside surfaces for receiving the correspondingly shapeddetents 416 located on the first andsecond spacers - To assemble the stackable product management display system, the
detents 416 located on the first andsecond spacers sockets 418 on the outside surfaces of the first andsecond trays - In another exemplary embodiment depicted in
Figures 53-57 , apusher paddle 500 may be mounted directly to ashelf 508 and held to the shelf by the end of thecoiled spring 504. Thepusher paddle 500 will slide along and on top of the surface of the shelf. One ormore dividers 502 that define a T-shaped configuration may be positioned next to thepusher paddle 500. In an alternative aspect, the base of thedivider 502 may be positioned on the shelf such that the base is located underneath thepusher paddle 500. With this configuration, thepusher paddle 500 may slide along the base of the divider. If thedividers 502 are positioned sufficiently far away from thepaddle 500, thepaddle 500 will slide directly on the surface of theshelf 508. Thedividers 502 may define numerous configurations including those described herein and may be secured to the shelf using any known technique, including push pins, rivets, fasteners, adhesives and the like. - In one aspect, the
end 510 of thecoiled spring 504 is positioned within a hole oraperture 506 located on theshelf 508. Theend 510 may define a spring tip that may further define any suitable configuration that permits the spring end to pass into thehole 506 and remain secured to the hole. For example, the spring tip ofend 510 may define a hook-shaped configuration that permits theend 510 to wrap around the edges of thehole 506. Alternatively, the spring tip may define one or more catches that hook onto the edges of thehole 506. Still other spring tip configurations are possible. - As shown in
Figure 54 , to further secure thespring 504 to theshelf 508, a fastener 512, pin, rivet or the like may be used. This fastener 512 will provide a second spaced-apart anchoring point for the spring that will hold the spring in the desired alignment during the full operation of thespring 504 as thepaddle 500 moves back and forth on theshelf 508. It will be appreciated that depending on the shelf type and the number and spacing of existing holes on the shelf, even more anchoring points are possible. - Referring to
Figures 55-57 , there is depicted an exemplary mounting technique for mounting thespring 504 of thepaddle 500 onto a shelf. As shown inFigure 55 , theend 510 of thespring 504 is inserted into thehole 506 on the shelf. Theend 510 may define a spring tip as described herein to hold theend 510 to the edges of thehole 506. As shown inFigure 56 , thespring 504, which in this embodiment includes a rivet orstud 514, is lowered onto the shelf such that the rivet orstud 514 fits within anotherhole 506 located on the shelf. This rivet or stud provides another anchoring point for the spring. As shown inFigures 56 and57 , thespring 504 may define anaperture 516 for receiving yet another rivet orstud 518 to even further secure thespring 504 to the shelf. With these multiple anchoring points, thespring 504 will be secured to the shelf, and thus the paddle will be secured to the shelf. Also, with these multiple anchoring points, the spring will retain the desired alignment during the full operation of the spring as the paddle moves back and forth on the shelf. It should be understood that other anchoring techniques are possible to secure the end of thespring 504 to the shelf, including any of the technique described herein, or any combination of the techniques described herein. It should be appreciated that if a shelf does not have pre-existing holes that could be used to anchor thespring 504, one or more holes could be drilled into the shelf at the desired locations. - With the embodiment depicted in
Figures 53-57 , it can be appreciated that a trackless pusher paddle may be retrofitted directly onto existing store shelves with very minimal effort or extra mounting pieces. Additionally, this embodiment is easily removable to permit the repositioning of the pusher paddle at any location on the shelf to accommodate any size and type of product being merchandised on the shelf. One of skill in the art will also appreciate that any of the pusher paddles described herein may be mounted directly to the shelf using the techniques described herein, or by using any combination of the techniques described herein. - In an alternative embodiment, as depicted in
Figure 58 , a display management system is comprised of one ormore pushers 520, one ormore dividers 550, and afront rail 580. Thedivider 550 and thefront rail 580 can sit on a shelf. Thepusher 520 can include a pusher face 522 and apusher floor 524, as illustrated inFigure 59 . The pusher face 522 can be divided into anon-adjustable portion 526 andpusher extender 528. Thenon-adjustable portion 526 andpusher extender 528 both may define a surface that may be used to contact product on the shelf. Both thenon-adjustable portion 526 and thepusher extender 528 may define similar heights and depths. Thepusher extender 528 can adjust from a position that is flush with and adjacent to thenon-adjustable portion 526, as shown inFigure 59 . Thepusher extender 528 can be directed downward toward thepusher floor 524 as inFigure 60 . Thepusher extender 528 can be adjusted to a variety of positions as shown inFigure 60 , including a position that is parallel to thepusher floor 524 and a position that is directed upward away from thepusher floor 524 and a position that is directed downward toward thepusher floor 524. In this manner, the width or the height of thepusher 520 can be effectively extended for wider or taller products. - The
pusher extender 528 can rotate about an axis on the upper portion of thepusher 520. A notched wheel 532 (seeFigure 77 ) can be located behind thepusher extender 528. Thepusher extender 528 includes a protrusion (see,e.g. protrusion 530 inFigure 77 ) that fits within the notches in the notchedwheel 532. As thepusher extender 528 rotates, about the axis, the protrusion rotates into the various spaces within the notches in the notchedwheel 532, similar to a pawl and ratchet mechanism. Each notch represents a separate position for thepusher extender 528. In each separate position, thepusher extender 528 can remain stationary, such that a force is required to move thepusher extender 528 to a different position. In exemplary aspects of the embodiment, the pusher extender may rotate from a first position that is adjacent to thenon-adjustable portion 526 to one of numerous second positions that may be located within a range of approximately 180 degrees relative to the first position. The degree of adjustment may vary depending on the number, size and spacing of the notches on the notched wheel. The pusher extender may define a lightener aperture through the wall of the pusher extender to reduce the weight of the pusher extender and to reduce the moment created around the axis of the pusher extender. The pusher extender may define a smooth or textured pusher face. - Referring back to
Figure 59 , a biasing element, such as acoiled spring 534, can be maintained in a rear portion of thepusher 520. In an embodiment, thecoiled spring 534 can be positioned adjacent thenon-adjustable portion 526 of the pusher face 522. Thecoiled spring 534 can extend across thepusher floor 524 as shown inFigure 59 . In an embodiment, thepusher floor 524 can include achannel 536 in which thecoiled spring 534 sits. Thechannel 536 allows for product to sit on thepusher floor 524 with limited contact with the spring. The weight of the product rests on thepusher floor 524 in this embodiment. Thepusher floor 524 also can comprise a surface with no channel. - In an example, a
divider 550 can be comprised of adivider wall 552, afloor 554 and abarrier 556, as illustrated inFigure 59 . In an example, adivider 550 can include no barrier. In an example, adivider 550 can include no floor. Thedivider wall 552 can divide thedivider floor 554 into two portions, 559 and 551 (seeFigure 78 ) with one portion on each side of thedivider wall 552. Thedivider wall 552 also can have adivider floor 554 on only one side of thedivider wall 552. As illustrated inFigure 77 , thedivider wall 552 can extend perpendicularly from thedivider floor 554. Thedivider floor 554 can be a planar surface. In an embodiment, thedivider floor 554 can include a channel within a portion of thedivider floor 554. Thecoiled spring 534 can extend across thedivider floor 554. In an embodiment, thecoiled spring 534 can extend across thedivider floor 554 within a channel in thedivider floor 554. In this embodiment, product will not rest on thecoiled spring 534 and instead will rest on the portions of thedivider floor 554 that are adjacent the channel in thedivider floor 554. In another embodiment, thedivider floor 554 does not include a channel. In an example, asingle pusher 520 can be located on one portion of thedivider floor 554 and a second pusher (seeFigure 84F ) can be located on a second portion of thedivider floor 554. Thus, onedivider 550 can contain twopushers 520, one on each side of thedivider wall 552. - The
barrier 556 can be configured to restrain product that is being pushed by thepusher 520 and the biasing element contained therein. Thebarrier 556 can be located at the front of thedivider wall 552, as illustrated inFigure 59 . Thebarrier 556 may also be located at the rear of the divider wall to prevent overstocking of product on the shelf. As shown inFigures 59 and77 , thedivider wall 552 can divide thebarrier 556 into two portions. Thebarrier 556 can be perpendicular to the front end of thedivider wall 552. In an embodiment, thebarrier 556, thedivider wall 552 and thedivider floor 554 are a single integrated device. These three elements can also be integral with each other. In an example, the barrier is separate from the divider. In an example, the barrier is not integral with or integrated with the divider. In another example, the barrier is configured to engage with the divider. In an example, the divider wall and the divider floor are separate devices from each other and are not integral with each other or part of a single integrated device. In an example, the divider wall and the divider floor are configured to engage with each other. In further examples, a barrier can be connected to thefront rail 580 or comprise a portion of thefront rail 580. - As illustrated in
Figure 61 , anend 557 of acoiled spring 534 can be positioned within thebarrier 556. Theend 557 of the spring can be folded at an angle to the remainder of the spring. This angle can be 90 degrees or any other suitable angle that may be less than or greater than 90 degrees. Theend 557 of the coiled spring can then be placed into aslot 558 within thebarrier 556. Once in theslot 558, the end of thespring 557 will remain in place and will assist in biasing thepusher 520 toward thebarrier 556. Anend 557 of thecoiled spring 534 can include a plurality of portions, each with bends that place a subsequent portion of the end of the coiled spring at an angle to a previous portion of the coiled spring (not shown). The plurality of bends can engage a plurality of slots or apertures in thebarrier 556 or other connection point on thedivider 550 orfront rail 580. The plurality of slots or apertures can conform to the shape of the plurality of bends in theend 557 of thecoiled spring 534. Thecoiled spring 534 can include a catch (not shown) at one end. The catch in thecoiled spring 534 can be configured to prevent thecoiled spring 534 from disengaging with thepusher 520, such as, for example, when thecoiled spring 534 is extended. - The
pusher 520 may be connected to thedivider 550 by only thecoiled spring 534. Thepusher 520 can sit on top of thedivider floor 554 and can slide across the divider floor. Thepusher 520 can be configured to rest entirely above thedivider floor 554 as shown inFigure 59 and not go below thedivider floor 554. In this embodiment, thepusher 520 can be picked up off thedivider floor 554 as shown inFigure 62 . Gravity and the weight of product sitting on thepusher floor 524 maintain thepusher 520 on thedivider floor 554. Product sitting on thecoiled spring 534 also maintains thepusher 520 on thedivider floor 554. The only integrated connection between the pusher and the divider can be the end of thecoiled spring 557 that is maintained within aslot 558 in thebarrier 556. Thedivider wall 552 may be used to guide thepusher 520 as thepusher 520 moves front to back, and vice versa, on thedivider floor 554. - The
divider 550 can define agroove 560 or other recess in an underside portion of the divider. Thisgroove 560 or other recess can be in the shape of an upside down "u" as shown inFigure 61 or can take another shape. Thegroove 560 or other recess can extend across the full width of the underside portion of thedivider 550. Thegroove 560, or other recess in an example, may extend along only a portion of the width of the underside portion of the divider. Thegroove 560 or other recess may be used to engage a front rail, front wall of a tray, or other structure. The term recess as used herein can mean a groove, slot, channel, indentation, depression or other recess that extends inwardly. - The
divider 550 also can define a plurality ofteeth 562 or other projection. Theteeth 562 or other projection can be located at the front portion of thebarrier 556. As illustrated in an exemplary embodiment inFigure 63 , theteeth 562 may define a series of outwardly-extending, angled surfaces that meet or join at an apex. As used herein, the term teeth can mean any uniform, non-uniform, continuous, non-continuous, evenly-spaced, or non-evenly-spaced outwardly-extending surfaces that may or may not be angled and that may or may not meet or join at an apex. Additionally, the teeth may define at an apex pointed, blunt, rounded, flat, or polygonal ends, or any other suitable shape. Also, the surfaces that define the shape of the teeth may be flat, convex, concave, smooth or textured, or any other suitable configuration. In an embodiment, theteeth 562 are placed on an extension from the front portion of thebarrier 556. Thedivider 550 also can define a resilient tongue ortab 564. Theteeth 562 or other projection can be located on theresilient tab 564. When a force is applied to theresilient tab 564, theteeth 562 or other projection can move in the direction of the force. When the force is removed, the teeth or other projection will move back to their original position. The term projection as used herein can mean a protrusion, resilient tab, tongue, bump, tooth or plurality of teeth, ridge, knob or other projection that extends outwardly. A plurality of teeth can include a plurality of projections where the teeth extend outwardly and can include a plurality of recesses that extend inwardly between the portions of the plurality of teeth that extend outwardly. - A
front rail 580 can define aplanar surface 582, a ridge ortongue 584 or other projection or engaging member, a channel or groove 586 or other recess or engaging member and a plurality ofteeth 588 or other engaging member. The ridge ortongue 584 or other projection or engaging member of thefront rail 580 can be configured to engage thegroove 560 or other recess or engaging member of the divider. Theridge 584 or other projection or other engaging member can fit within thegroove 560 or other recess or engaging member and inhibit thedivider 550 from moving in a direction perpendicular to theridge 584 orfront rail 580 or at an angle (i.e., out of perpendicular) to theridge 584 orfront rail 580. Theteeth 588 or other engaging member of thefront rail 580 can be spaced apart. Theteeth 588 or other engaging member of the front rail can engage theteeth 562 or other engaging member of thedivider 550, whichteeth 562 are illustrated inFigure 63 , so as to prevent the divider from moving in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580. Theteeth 588 or other engaging member of thefront rail 580 are engaged with theteeth 562 or other engaging member of thedivider 550 and prevent thedivider 550 from moving in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A" inFigure 65 . The term engaging member as used herein can mean a projection, recess, planar surface, near-planar surface, or other item of structure that can engage with another item of structure. The front rail may be a separate structure that is attached or coupled to a shelf. Alternatively, the front rail may be part of a tray that defines one or more of a front, back and opposing side walls. In this configuration, the front rail, as described herein, may be formed as part of a front or back wall of a tray and still achieve the objectives of the invention. That is, the front rail may be formed as part of the tray walls (or attached to the tray walls) and receive and engage the dividers and pusher mechanisms using any of the various techniques described herein. The front rail also need not be located in the absolute front of a shelf. The front rail can be located near the front of the shelf or in a location a distance back from the front of the shelf. In an example, the front rail can be located at or near the rear of the shelf, away from the front of the merchandise display system. The front of the shelf can include no rail in an example. - When the
resilient tab 564 of thedivider 550 is pressed or a force is placed on the resilient tab in a direction away from theteeth 588 in thefront rail 580, theteeth 562 of the divider can become disengaged with theteeth 588 on the front rail. When theteeth 588 on the front rail and theteeth 562 on theresilient tab 564 on thedivider 550 are disengaged, thedivider 550 can be moved in a lateral direction to theteeth 588 in the front rail 580 (i.e., the direction shown by arrow "A" inFigure 65 ). Through the use of thisresilient tab 564, products contained on themerchandise system 10 can be replanogrammed. When thedivider 550 is moved in a lateral direction, the divider need not be rotated. Instead, thedivider 550 remains in a plane parallel to theplanar surface 582 of thefront rail 580. In addition, thedivider 550 need not be lifted. Thedivider 550 can simply be moved in the direction noted by arrow "A" inFigure 65 . - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580 and at least onedivider 550 configured to engage thefront rail 580. The at least onedivider 550 includes abarrier 556 and the at least onedivider 550 further includes adivider wall 552. The at least one divider also includes adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, wherein thedivider floor 554 is configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes acam 720 coupled to thedivider 550, wherein thecam 720 is configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least onedivider 550 is engaged with thefront rail 580 and thecam 720 is in the first position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least onedivider 550 is engaged with thefront rail 580 and thecam 720 is in the second position. - In an example the
cam 720 includes a handle to rotate thecam 720 between the first position and the second position. In another example, thecam 720 can include a handle that allows thecam 720 to slide between a first position and a second position (not shown). Thecam 720 also can include one or more cam walls configured to engage one or more groove walls in thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the second position. Thecam 720 also can include a plurality of cam teeth configured to engage a plurality of front rail teeth on a surface of thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the second position. The front rail teeth can be on an inner surface of thefront rail 580. The merchandise display system also can include a pusher mechanism having a pusher surface, a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface, and a coiled spring having a coiled end and a free end. The coiled end of the spring can be positioned behind the pusher surface and the pusher mechanism can be attached to the merchandise display system only by the coiled spring. The barrier can be configured to receive the free end of the coiled spring. The front rail can define a front rail groove and the divider can define a divider ridge configured to engage the front rail groove. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580 and a plurality ofdividers 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580 and separate product into rows. Each of the plurality ofdividers 550 includes adivider wall 552 extending in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580, adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, wherein thedivider floor 554 is configured to hold product, and acam 720 coupled to thedivider 550, wherein thecam 720 is configured to move between a first position and a second position. Each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is engaged with thefront rail 580 and thecam 720 for each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is in the first position. In addition, each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is engaged with thefront rail 580 and thecam 720 for each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is in the second position. - In an example, each of the plurality of
dividers 550 is configured to move in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 when product is positioned on thedivider floor 554. A force on an outermost divider of the plurality ofdividers 550 can cause each of the plurality ofdividers 550 to move in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 when thecams 720 for each of the plurality ofdividers 550 is in the first position, and wherein the force is in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and perpendicular to thedivider wall 552 of the outermost divider. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580 and at least onedivider 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 including a barrier, adivider wall 552 extending in a direction perpendicular to the front rail, adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, wherein thedivider wall 552 separates thedivider floor 554 into a first portion and a second portion and each of the first portion and the second portion are configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes a first pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the first portion, a second pusher mechanism configured to slide along at least part of the second portion, and acam 720 coupled to the at least onedivider 550, thecam 720 configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least onedivider 550 is movable in a lateral direction parallel to and along thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the first position, and the at least onedivider 550 resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to and along thefront rail 580 when the cam is in the second position. - In an example, each of the first and second pusher mechanisms of the merchandise display system include a pusher surface, a pusher floor extending forwardly from the pusher surface, and a coiled spring having a coiled end and a free end, wherein the coiled end is positioned behind the pusher surface. The first and second pusher mechanisms are attached to the merchandise display system only by the coiled spring. The at least one divider can define a divider engaging member and the at least one front rail can define a front rail engaging member, and the divider engaging member can be configured to engage the front rail engaging member. The divider engaging member can define divider teeth on at least one surface of the divider engaging member and the front rail engaging member can define front rail teeth on at least one surface of the front rail engaging member. The divider teeth can be configured to engage the front rail teeth.
- In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580 and at least onedivider 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 including a barrier configured to engage thefront rail 580, adivider wall 552 extending in a direction perpendicular tofront rail 580, adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, wherein thedivider floor 554 is configured to hold product. The display system also can include a resilient tab coupled to thedivider 550, the resilient tab configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least onedivider 550 is fixed in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 when the resilient tab is in the first position. The at least onedivider 550 is movable in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 when the resilient tab is in the second position. - In an example, the
divider 550 includes a plurality of teeth configured to engage thefront rail 580. The divider teeth can be configured to engage corresponding teeth on thefront rail 580. The divider teeth of the merchandise display system can be configured to engage a resilient surface on thefront rail 580. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580, thefront rail 580 comprising at least one first projection and at least one first recess, and at least onedivider 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 comprising adivider wall 552 and adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, the at least onedivider 550 further comprising at least one second recess and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of the divider550 configured to move between a first position and a second position, The at least onedivider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least one first projection of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the at least one second recess of thedivider 550 and the at least one second projection of thedivider 550 is in the first position. The at least one divider 550 (a) resists movement in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) is secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least one first projection of the front rail is engaged with the at least one second recess of thedivider 550 and the at least one second projection of thedivider 550 is in the second position. - In an example, the at least one second projection of the
divider 550 can comprise acam 720. The at least one first recess of thefront rail 580 can comprise a groove. The at least one second projection of thedivider 550 can include a resilient tab. The at least one first projection of thefront rail 580 can comprise a tongue. The at least one first projection of thefront rail 580 can comprise a plurality of teeth. The at least one second projection of thedivider 550 can comprise a tongue. The at least one second projection of thedivider 550 can include a plurality of teeth. The merchandise display system also can include a plurality of teeth on the at least one first projection of thefront rail 580 and a plurality of teeth on the at least one second recess of thedivider 550. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580, thefront rail 580 including at least one first projection and at least one second projection, the at least one second projection of thefront rail 580 configured to move between a first position and a second position. The merchandise display system also includes at least onedivider 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 comprising adivider wall 552 and adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, the at least onedivider 550 further comprising at least one recess. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least one first projection of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the at least one recess of thedivider 550 and the at least one second projection of thefront rail 580 is in the first position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least one first projection of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the at least one recess of thedivider 550 and the at least one second projection of thefront rail 580 is in the second position. - In an example, the at least one first projection of the
front rail 580 can comprise a tongue and the at least one recess of thedivider 550 can comprise a groove. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580, thefront rail 580 comprising a first projection and a second projection. The merchandise display system also includes at least onedivider 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 comprising adivider wall 552 and adivider floor 554 perpendicular to thedivider wall 552, the at least onedivider 550 further comprising a recess and a third projection. The at least one of the second projection or the third projection is a movable projection that is movable between a first position and a second position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the first projection of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the recess of thedivider 550 and the movable projection is in the first position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the first projection of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the recess of thedivider 550 and the movable projection is in the second position. - In an example, the movable projection of the merchandise display system can be a
cam 720 or a resilient tab. The first projection of thefront rail 580 can be a tongue and the recess of thedivider 550 can be a groove. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580, thefront rail 580 comprising at least a first engaging member. The merchandise display system also includes at least onedivider 550 configured to attach to thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 comprising adivider wall 552 and adivider floor 554 perpendicular to the divider wall, the at least onedivider 550 further comprising at least a second engaging member. The merchandise display system also includes a third engaging member configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) movable in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and (b) secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the first engaging member of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the second engaging member of thedivider 550 and the third engaging member is in the first position. The at least onedivider 550 is (a) fixed in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail and (b) secured in the direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the first engaging member of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the second engaging member of thedivider 550 and the third engaging member is in the second position. In an example, when the first engaging member of thefront rail 580 is engaged with the second engaging member of thedivider 550 and the third engaging member is in the first position, the at least onedivider 550 is movable in the plane of a shelf (such asshelf 596 shown inFigures 70 and71 ) only in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580; the at least onedivider 550 is fixed in the plane of the shelf in all directions other than the direction parallel to thefront rail 580; the at least onedivider 550 may not twist, splay of fish tail in the plane of the shelf; the at least onedivider 550 remains perpendicular to thefront rail 580. - In an example, the third engaging member can be a portion of the
front rail 580 or a portion of thedivider 550. In an example, the third engaging member can comprise acam 720 or an engaging surface. In an example, the first engaging member of thefront rail 580 is a projection. The merchandise display system also can include apusher mechanism 520 having apusher surface 528, apusher floor 524 extending forwardly from thepusher surface 528, and acoiled spring 534 having a coiled end and a free end. The coiled end can be positioned behind thepusher surface 528 and thepusher mechanism 520 is attached to the merchandise display system only by thecoiled spring 534. The merchandise display system also can include a barrier that is configured to receive the free end of thecoiled spring 534. - In an example, a merchandise display system includes a
front rail 580 and at least onedivider 550 configured to engage thefront rail 580, the at least onedivider 550 including abarrier 556, the at least one divider further including adivider wall 554, the at least one divider further including adivider floor 552 perpendicular to thedivider wall 554, wherein thedivider floor 552 is configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes acam 720 coupled to thedivider 550, wherein thecam 720 is configured to move between a first position and a second position. The at least onedivider 550 can be secured in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 when the at least onedivider 550 is engaged with thefront rail 580. Thecam 720 can inhibit movement of the at least onedivider 550 in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the first position. Thecam 720 can allow movement of thedivider 550 in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the second position. The merchandise display system can include a handle to rotate thecam 720 between the first position and the second position. The merchandise display system can include a handle to slide thecam 720 between the first position and the second position (not shown). -
Figures 67A-67C show an example of a step by step approach to placement of a divider into a front rail. To begin, as illustrated inFigure 67A , thedivider 550 is lowered into thechannel 586 defined by thefront rail 580. The force of lowering thedivider 550 into thechannel 586 causes theteeth 562 on thedivider 550 to contact the top of thefront rail 580 and move in a direction toward thedivider 550 and away from thefront rail 580, as illustrated inFigure 67B . Theteeth 562 on thedivider 550 may be ramped teeth as shown inFigure 63 . Thefront rail 580 includesrecesses 589, as illustrated inFigure 64 , that are shaped to engage theteeth 562 on thedivider 550. Theserecesses 589 are spaced by theteeth 588 present on thefront rail 580. When thedivider 550 is lowered further into thechannel 586 on thefront rail 580, as illustrated inFigure 67C , theteeth 564 of thedivider 550 move past the top of thefront rail 580 and move into therecesses 589 in thefront rail 580. When theteeth 564 on thedivider 550 are in therecesses 589 in thefront rail 580, thedivider 550 is in an engaged position and will not move in a lateral direction under a normal amount of force. - In an example,
Figures 68A-68C show a step by step approach to placement of a divider in a front rail in another embodiment. In the initial step, as illustrated inFigure 68A , the resilient tongue ortab 564 is manually pushed backward causing theteeth 562 on thetab 564 to move backward toward thedivider 550. An axle style pivot allows for the resilient tongue ortab 564 to remain in the pushed back position and allows theteeth 562 to remain in the position toward thedivider 550. Thedivider 550 is then placed in contact with thefront rail 580, as illustrated inFigure 68B . Thegroove 560 of thedivider 550 engages the ridge ortongue 584 of thefront rail 580. At this point thedivider 550 can be moved in a lateral direction along the front rail and can allow for ease of replanogramming. However, thedivider 550 is secured in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 (i.e., parallel to the divider 550) and cannot be moved in this direction, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play between thegrove 560 of thedivider 550 and the ridge ortongue 584 offront rail 580. (The direction perpendicular to the front rail is noted by arrow "B" inFigure 86H .) This insignificantly small amount of play may not be noticeable to a user of the system. While thedivider 550 is in contact with thefront rail 580 and thegroove 560 of thedivider 550 engages the ridge ortongue 584 of thefront rail 580, as illustrated inFigure 68B , thedivider 550 can move in the plane of the shelf (the shelf is noted as 596 inFigures 70 and71 ) only in the lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 (i.e., the direction noted by arrow "A" inFigure 65 ). The divider is fixed and immovable in the plane of the shelf under normal operating forces in all other directions other than the direction parallel to thefront rail 580. The divider cannot twist, splay, fish tail or otherwise move in the plane of the shelf in a direction other than the direction parallel to thefront rail 580. Thedivider 550 may, however, be able to move in a direction out of the plane of the shelf, such as the direction noted by arrow "C" inFigure 87B . Thedivider 550, with or without product on thedivider floor 554, can be slid in the direction previously noted by arrow "A" inFigure 65 , without requiring that thedivider 550 be lifted up. In the final step, as illustrated inFigure 68C , the resilient tongue ortab 564 is manually pulled forward away from thedivider 550. This movement causes theteeth 562 on thefront divider 550 to fit withinrecesses 589 in thefront rail 580. Therecesses 589 in thefront rail 580 are spaced byteeth 588 in the front rail. When theteeth 562 of thedivider 550 are in contact with therecesses 589 andteeth 588 in thefront rail 580, thedivider 550 is engaged and cannot move in a lateral direction under a normal amount of force. - In another example, the resilient tongue or tab does not include an axle style pivot that allows for the resilient tongue or
tab 564 to remain in the pushed back position. Instead, the resilient tongue ortab 564 is biased toward thefront rail 580 and away from thedivider 550 such that the tongue ortab 564 automatically returns to its resting position and may engage thefront rail 580 when the force manually pushing the resilient tongue ortab 564 backward is removed. - In an example, a
divider 550 is placed in contact with afront rail 580. An engaging member of thefront rail 580 engages with an engaging member of thedivider 550, which secures the divider in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "B" inFigure 86H ) and renders thedivider 550 immovable in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play or space between the engaging members that may not be noticeable to a user. Thedivider 550 also is secured in the plane of the shelf in all directions other than the direction parallel to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "A" inFigure 65 ). Thedivider 550 can move in the plane of the shelf only in the direction parallel to thefront rail 580. Thedivider 550 is fixed, under normal operating forces and conditions, in the plane of the shelf in a direction other than the direction parallel to thefront rail 580. The divider, however, may be movable in a direction out of the plane of the shelf, such as a direction noted by arrow "C" inFigure 87B . When the divider is "secured" in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580, this means that thedivider 550 is immovable, under normal operating forces and conditions, in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play or space between the engaging members that may not be noticeable to a user. The direction perpendicular to the front rail is noted by arrow "B" inFigure 86H . A second engaging member of thefront rail 580 or thedivider 550 is in a first position and the divider is moved laterally, parallel to the front rail. The second engaging member is then moved to a second position, which makes thedivider 550 fixed in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "A" inFigure 65 ) under normal operating conditions and forces. When thedivider 550 is "fixed" in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580, thedivider 550 will not move in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 under normal operating conditions and forces. - In an example, a plurality of
dividers 550 can be moved as a group parallel to thefront rail 580 while remaining secured to thefront rail 580 in a direction perpendicular to the front rail (the direction noted by arrow "B" inFigure 86H ). Each of a plurality ofdividers 550 can be placed in contact with afront rail 580. An engaging member or a plurality of engaging members of thefront rail 580 engage(s) with an engaging member on each of the plurality ofdividers 550, which secures each of the plurality ofdividers 550 in a direction perpendicular to the front rail 580 (the direction noted by arrow "B" inFigure 86H ) and renders each of the plurality ofdividers 550 immovable in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play or space between the engaging members that may not be noticeable to a user. A second engaging member (or a plurality of second engaging members) of thefront rail 580 or each of thedividers 550 is in a first position, which allows the plurality ofdividers 550 to be moved laterally, parallel to thefront rail 580. The plurality ofdividers 550 can form rows between thedividers 550 that are configured for holding product. Product can be placed between two of the plurality ofdividers 550 as shown inFigures 45-47 . A force can be applied to a first divider in the direction parallel to thefront rail 580. This force can move the first divider in the direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and cause thedivider 550 to contact a product adjacent thefirst divider 550. (Product is shown inFigures 45-47 as cans or cartons and can take other shapes.) Thedivider 550 then can force the product to move in the same direction as thefirst divider 550, i.e., parallel to thefront rail 580. The force can move the product to come in contact with asecond divider 550 adjacent the product. The product can then force thesecond divider 550 to move in in the same direction as thefirst divider 550 and the product, i.e., parallel to thefront rail 580. The second divider can then force a second product adjacent thesecond divider 550 to move in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580. The second product can force athird divider 550 adjacent the second product to move in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580. In this manner, a series ofdividers 550 and products all can be moved in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580 with a single force acting on only one of thedividers 550 or products in a direction parallel to thefront 580. When the second engaging member or members on thefront rail 580 or one of the plurality ofdividers 550 is moved to a second position, which makes thedivider 550 fixed in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 under normal operating conditions and forces, thedivider 550 cannot move in the direction parallel to thefront rail 580 and thedivider 550 will not forceother dividers 550 or products to move in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580. - In an example, when the second engaging member is moved to a second position, the second engaging member inhibits movement of the
divider 550 in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580. Under a force equal to or less than a predefined amount of force, the second engaging member prevents thedivider 550 from moving in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580. When an amount of force above the predefined amount of force is applied to thedivider 550 in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580, thedivider 550 can move in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580. - In an embodiment as illustrated in
Figure 66 , the thickness of thedivider floor 554 varies. The thickness of a front portion of thedivider floor 554 where it is adjacent theplanar surface 582 of the front rail is less than the thickness of a rear portion of thedivider floor 554 further back, where it is not adjacent theplanar surface 582 of the front rail. As shown inFigure 67 , the portion ofdivider floor 554A is thinner than the portion ofdivider floor 554B. In an example, the thickness of the front portion of the divider floor adjacent theplanar surface 582 of afront rail 580 is at least 25% less than the thickness of a rear portion of thedivider floor 554 that is non-adjacent theplanar surface 582 of thefront rail 580. - An embodiment, as illustrated in
Figures 69A and 69B , includesrail mounting clips 590 for thefront rail 580. As illustrated inFigure 69B , thefront rail 580 includes anaperture 592. Thisaperture 592 can be coordinated to be placed overapertures 595 on ashelf 596 in a retail environment as shown inFigure 70 . Therail mounting clips 590 can be curved. Therail mounting clips 590 also contain anarrow portion 594 at one end of the rail mounting clips 590. Therail mounting clips 590 can be inserted into the wider, round portion of theaperture 592 in thefront rail 580 and intoapertures 595 on theshelf 596 in the retail environment as shown inFigure 71 . Therail mounting clips 590 can then be shifted laterally to a narrower portion within theaperture 592 in thefront rail 580. By shifting therail mounting clips 590, the wider round portion of therail mounting clips 590 will engage the narrower portion of theaperture 592 in the front rail and will be locked into place. Therail mounting clips 590 thereby hold thefront rail 580 in place and prevent thefront rail 580 from movement in the lateral direction. If it is known prior to shipping that a store shelf will have holes, therail mounting clips 590 can be inserted and locked into thefront rail 580 in advance of shipping. Inserting therail mounting clips 590 in advance of shipping can add to ease of installation of the merchandise system in the store environment. - In at least one embodiment, the height of the
divider wall 552 may be greater than the height of thebarrier 556, as shown inFigures 72 and73 .Figure 74 further displays theend 557 of thecoiled spring 534 maintained within thebarrier 556. Theend 557 of thespring 534 is bent at an angle of approximately 90 degrees to the remainder of thespring body 534. Theend 557 is placed within aslot 558 maintained within thebarrier 556. - In an embodiment, the
divider 550 containsteeth 600, as illustrated inFigures 72 and73 . These teeth can be molded to be integral with thedivider 550. Theteeth 600 are not maintained on a resilient tab or tongue as in other embodiments. Theteeth 600 are spaced apart from each other. A plurality ofteeth 600 can be placed on thedivider 550 at the bottom of a front portion of thedivider 550 and in front of thebarrier 556. - As illustrated in
Figure 75 , afront rail 610 can include a plurality ofteeth 612. Theteeth 612 in thefront rail 610 can be designed to releasably engage theteeth 600 of thedivider 550 through use of acam bar 622 in thefront rail 610 and camming action, as illustrated inFigure 76 . Thefront rail 610 also includes aplanar surface 614 that is substantially flat or planar and a tongue orridge 616 that is substantially perpendicular to theplanar surface 614, as illustrated inFigure 75 . Thefront rail 610 further includes acam bar lever 618 that moves thecam bar 622 within thefront rail 610, as shown inFigures 76A and 76B . InFigure 76A , thecam bar lever 618 is in a first position in which theteeth 612 of thefront rail 610 are withdrawn into thefront rail 610 away from the divider. InFigure 76B , thecam bar lever 618 is in a second position in which theteeth 612 of thefront rail 610 are extended toward thedivider 550. -
Figure 77 shows an exploded view of several aspects of an embodiment.Front rail 610 is shown to include anextruded shell 620, acam bar 622 and atooth bar 624. Thetooth bar 624 contains a plurality ofteeth 612. Theextruded shell 620 includes acam area 626 designed to house thecam bar 622 and thetooth bar 624. Thecam bar 622 is located on the base of thefront rail 610 adjacent to the extrudedshell 620. Thecam bar 624 is in contact with thecam bar lever 618. Thecam bar lever 618 can operate to move thecam bar 622 back and forth in a lateral direction. Thecam bar 622 further includeselongated cam reservoirs 628. Thecam reservoirs 628 are diagonal with a front end of thecam reservoir 628 closer to the front end of thefront rail 610 and a rear end of thereservoir 628 further back from the front end of thefront rail 610. - The
tooth bar 624 may includecam studs 630. The toothbar cam studs 630 are placed within thecam bar reservoirs 628 during operation of thefront rail 610. When thecam bar 622 and thecam bar reservoirs 628 move laterally, the toothbar cam studs 630 move in a perpendicular direction to the movement of thecam bar 622. The toothbar cam studs 630 move toward the front of the front rail 610 (and away from theteeth 600 of the divider) and away from the front of the front rail 610 (and toward theteeth 600 of the divider) as thecam bar 622 moves laterally back and forth within thecam area 626. As the toothbar cam studs 630 move, thetooth bar 624 also moves. Thus, when thecam bar lever 618 is moved from a first position to a second position, it moves thecam bar 622 laterally along the inside of thefront rail 610. This lateral movement of thecam bar 622 causes thetooth bar 624 and theteeth 612 thereon to move in a direction perpendicular to the direction of thecam bar 622; that is, thetooth bar 624 moves in a direction toward or away from the front of thefront rail 610 and toward or away from theteeth 600 on thedivider 550.Figure 78 shows a rear exploded view of several aspects of the embodiment shown inFigure 77 -
Figures 79A-79C show an example of a step by step guide to placement of thedivider 550 into thefront rail 610. Thedivider 550 includingteeth 600 on the divider is lowered into thechannel 640 of thefront rail 610, as illustrated inFigure 79A . Thetooth bar 624 initially is in a position closer to the front of thefront rail 610 and theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624 are not engaged with theteeth 600 of thedivider 550. Thecam bar lever 618 is in a first position which maintains theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624 out of engagement with thedivider teeth 600, as illustrated inFigure 79B . In this position, thedivider 550 can be moved laterally along the ridge ortongue 616 of thefront rail 610. Thedivider 550 can have product sit on thedivider floor 554 as thedivider 550 is moved laterally along the front rail in the direction shown inFigure 77 by arrow "A". Theridge 584 or other projection in thefront rail 580 can engage thegroove 560 or other recess in thedivider 550 to secure thedivider 550 and prevent the divider from movement in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play (e.g., less than 3 mm) between theridge 584 and thegroove 560, under normal operating conditions and forces. Thecam bar lever 618 is then moved from a first position to second position. The movement of thecam bar lever 618 causes thecam bar 622 to move in a lateral direction within the extrudedshell 620. The movement of thecam bar 622 includes movement of the diagonalcam bar reservoirs 628 in the lateral direction. Movement of thecam bar reservoirs 628 in turn causes the toothbar cam studs 630 to move in a direction perpendicular to the direction of thecam bar 622 and in a direction toward theteeth 600 of thedivider 550, as illustrated inFigure 79C . The toothbar cam studs 630 are coupled to and may be integral with thetooth bar 624. Accordingly, movement of the toothbar cam studs 630 causes thetooth bar 624 and theteeth 612 contained therein to move toward theteeth 600 of the divider. This movement causes theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624 to become engaged with theteeth 600 of the divider. When theteeth 612 of the tooth bar are engaged with theteeth 600 of the divider, thedivider 550 is releasably engaged and will not move in a lateral direction shown by arrow "A" inFigure 77 under normal operating forces and conditions. - The
tooth bar 624 is fixed on its ends such that thetooth bar 624 can only move in a direction that is toward or away from theteeth 600 of the divider. Thetooth bar 624 cannot move in a lateral direction shown inFigure 77 by arrow "A". Thecam bar 622 operates in the opposite manner. Thecam bar 622 is fixed such that thecam bar 622 can only move in a lateral direction shown inFigure 77 by arrow "A". The cam bar cannot move toward or away from theteeth 600 on the divider -
Figure 80 provides an isometric view of aspects of an embodiment. When theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624 are engaged with theteeth 600 of the divider, theentire merchandise system 10 is locked. Thefront rail 610 and thedivider 550 are releasably engaged with each other and will not move relative to each other. In addition, thepusher 520 is engaged with thedivider 550. In this position, theentire merchandise system 10 can be moved. Themerchandise system 10 can be set up in a remote location according to a particular planogram and then locked. Themerchandise system 10 can then be shipped to the store location. At the store location themerchandise system 10 can be removed from the shipping container and placed on the shelf like a mat. The planogramming of thedividers 550 will remain intact while themerchandise system 10 is locked. - In an example, a display system is assembled in a remote location away from a shelf and then moved as a unit to the shelf and secured to the shelf. A plurality of
dividers 550 are engaged with afront rail 580 in a manner in which they are secured and will not significantly move in a direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580. The plurality ofdividers 550 are adjusted laterally parallel to thefront rail 580 according to a pre-panned planogram or other arrangement. The plurality ofdividers 550 include engaging members and thefront rail 580 includes engaging members. The engaging members on the plurality ofdividers 550 and/or the engaging members on thefront rail 580 are adjusted from a first position to second position to fix the plurality ofdividers 550 to thefront rail 580 such that the plurality of dividers cannot move in any direction in relation to thefront rail 580. Thefront rail 580 and the plurality ofdividers 550 are then moved as a unit to the shelf. Thefront rail 580 then is secured to the shelf. - To alter the planogramming of the merchandise system at the store location, the
dividers 550 and the product need not be removed from the shelf. Thecam bar lever 618 or other engaging member for each of thedividers 550 can be moved to its initial position. By moving thecam bar lever 618 or other engaging member to its initial position, theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624 release from theteeth 600 of the divider (or one engaging member disengages from another engaging member). In this position, thedividers 550 can be moved laterally in the direction denoted by arrow "A" inFigure 80 . Product can remain in place on thedivider floors 554 and thepusher floors 524 while thedividers 550 are being moved. Once thedividers 550 have been moved to the new planogram position, thecam bar lever 618 or other engaging member for each of thedividers 550 can be moved to its second position. Theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 622 will then engage theteeth 600 of the divider 550 (or one engaging member will engage with another engaging member) and again cause themerchandise system 10 to become locked. - In an example, operation of the camming action is further shown in
Figures 81A and 81B. Figure 81A shows theteeth 600 of the divider not engaged with theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624. In the embodiment, thecam bar 622 is adjacent the front wall of thefront rail 610. InFigure 81B , thecam bar lever 618 has been moved to the second position, thecam bar 622 has moved laterally and the toothbar cam studs 630 have moved toward thedivider 550. Theteeth 612 of thetooth bar 624 also have moved toward thedivider 550 and have engaged thedivider teeth 600. - In an embodiment, a soft rubber pad can be utilized in place of the
teeth 612 ontooth bar 624 and can function as an engaging member. In this embodiment, when thetooth bar 624 is adjacent the front portion of thefront rail 610, the soft rubber pad and thedivider teeth 600 are not in contact with each other. When thecam bar lever 618 is moved to its second position and thecam bar 622 moves thetooth bar 624 in the direction of thedivider teeth 600, thedivider teeth 600 come into contact with and thereby engage the soft rubber pad. This contact provides resistive interference and maintains thedivider teeth 600 in place and prevents thedivider 550 from lateral movement in the direct noted inFigure 77 by arrow "A". - In another embodiment, as shown in
Figures 82A-82C , thedivider 550 is held in place in contact with thefront rail 580 through use of a clamp.Figure 82A-82C show a step by step process for insertion of thedivider 550 into thefront rail 580. Initially, as illustrated inFigure 82A , thedivider 550 is lowered into achannel 640 formed in the front rail 580 (or 610). In addition, a ridge ortongue 644 in thefront rail 580 contacts achannel 645 in thedivider 550. Thedivider 550 includes a bump or outwardly extendingridge 650 at a front portion of thedivider 550. Aclamp 652 on thefront rail 580 is rotated to engage thebump 650 of thedivider 550. Theclamp 652 snaps over thebump 650 and locks thebump 650 and thedivider 550 into place. Once releasably engaged, thedivider 550 cannot move in the lateral direction noted inFigure 80 by arrow "A". To move thedivider 550, theclamp 652 must be pulled to unsnap theclamp 652 from thedivider bump 650. - In another embodiment, as shown in
Figures 83A-83C , thedivider 550 is held in place in contact with thefront rail 580 through use of arotating rod 660 that includes teeth.Figures 83A-83C show a step by step process for insertion of thedivider 550 into thefront rail 580. Initially, as illustrated inFigure 83A , thedivider 550 is lowered into achannel 640 formed in thefront rail 580. Thefront rail 580 includes arotating rod 660 which itself includes teeth. When thedivider 550 initially is lowered into the channel, as illustrated inFigure 83B , the teeth of therotating rod 660 are in a first position in which they are not engaged with theteeth 600 of thedivider 550. Ahandle 662 is coupled to therotating rod 660. When the handle is in afirst position 664, the teeth of therotating rod 660 are in a first position in which they are not engaged with theteeth 600 of thedivider 500. When thehandle 662 is moved to asecond position 668, as illustrated inFigure 83C , thehandle 662 rotates therotating rod 660 and moves the teeth on therotating rod 662 into a position in which they engage theteeth 600 on thedivider 550. In this position, the rod teeth are in an interfering condition with thedivider teeth 600. When the rod teeth and thedivider teeth 600 are engaged with each other thedivider 550 cannot move in the lateral direction noted inFigure 80 by arrow "A". To move thedivider 550, therod 660 must be returned to itsfirst position 664 and the teeth of therod 660 moved out of engagement with theteeth 600 on thedivider 550. - In an embodiment, a plurality of
pushers 520 anddividers 550 can be used with asingle front rail 580.Figures 84A-84E show the use of twopushers 520 and twodividers 550 to push product toward the front of the shelf. Use ofmultiple pushers 520 can allow for pushing of wide product, shown schematically in the Figures. In addition, placing thepusher extender 528 in its upwardly extended position can allow thepushers 520 to push taller products or more products as shown inFigures 84D and84E . In an embodiment, adivider 550 can be coupled to twopushers 520. Onepusher 520 can be engaged to a portion of thebarrier 556 on each side of thedivider wall 552 as shown inFigure 84F . In other examples, the divider can be coupled to one pusher or the divider can be coupled to no pusher. - In another embodiment, the
divider 550 is secured to thefront rail 580 in part through the operation of acam 720, as illustrated inFigure 85. Figure 85 illustrates acam 720 in a side perspective view coupled to thebarrier 556. Thecam 720 includes arounded portion 722 that is configured to rotate within a cavity 740 (seeFigure 86G ) inbarrier 556. Thecam 720 also includes atongue 724 that is comprised of afirst cam wall 726, a second cam wall, 728, and athird cam wall 730. InFigure 85 , the cam is in a position where it is not engaged with the front rail. In this position, thefirst cam wall 726 can be in a substantially vertical alignment. In this position thesecond cam wall 728 and thethird cam wall 730 may also be in a substantially horizontal alignment. Thefirst cam wall 726 connects with thesecond cam wall 728. Thesecond cam wall 728 connects with thethird cam wall 730. The cam also includes ahandle 732. - In another embodiment, the
tongue 724 only has two cam walls. A first cam wall, such asfirst cam wall 726, and a second cam wall. The second cam wall is straight and spans the length shown bycam walls divider 550 or can extend the entire width of thedivider 550. - In another embodiment shown in
Figures 92-94 , thecam 720 may define a cam glide surface 733 (hereinafter referred to as the cam glide) located on a bottom side of the cam, opposite of thehandle 732. Thecam glide 733 serves as a low friction glide bump to improve the slidability of the divider relative to the rail. In operation, thecam glide 733 lifts the divider up off of the rail to reduce friction between the divider and the rail, thereby improving the slidability of the divider relative to the rail. As seen in the Figures, thecam glide 733 of thecam 720 extends below or beneath the bottom surface of the divider and is the contact point between the divider and the rail. In this configuration, when the divider is moved laterally relative to the rail, the primary contact between the divider and the rail is just the cam glide, and no significant other portions of the divider and rail contact each other. This single contact point therefore reduces the friction between the divider and the rail. - The cam glide may further define a planar surface extending outwardly from the rounded
portion 722 of thecam 720. Thecam glide 733 may be centrally positioned on therounded portion 722 of the cam to provide stability and balance to the divider relative to the rail. It should be understood, however, that the cam glide may be located at any other suitable location on the cam. The planar surface of the cam glide may terminate at an elongated edge that is sized and shaped to slide freely in thechannel 586 of therail 580 to thereby permit ease of lateral movement of the divider relative to the rail. The elongated edge of the planar surface may define rounded or contoured edge surfaces to further aid in the free movement of the cam glide relative to the rail. It should be understood that the cam glide may define other configurations that permit the cam glide to fit within or along the rail and also permit the slidable movement of the divider relative to the rail. For example, the cam glide may define a bump or rounded protrusion or a series of bumps or rounded protrusions, which would accomplish the same objective as the planar surface defining an elongated edge. While thecam 720 defining acam glide 733 are depicted being used with a divider, the cam and cam glide may be used with the pusher or pusher assembly or other components that are mounted to the rail. - In another embodiment, the
cam 720 defining thecam glide 733 may be mounted to the rear of the divider or pusher, and may operatively engage a rear rail that is mounted at the rear of the shelf. In this embodiment, thecam 720 may be used to secure and prevent lateral movement of the divider or pusher relative to the rear rail, if used on the shelf. In other words, the cam and cam glide described herein may be used to secure the divider or pusher to a front rail or a back rail, or both, depending on the desired application. - In an exemplary aspect, the
cam 720 serves as a lock to lock the divider or pusher to either the front rail or rear rail, or both. Thecam 720, when moved to a locked position, will lock the divider or pusher to the rail and prevent lateral movement of the divider or pusher relative to the rail. In an unlocked position, thecam 720 permits slidable movement of the divider or pusher relative to the rail. In an exemplary aspect, thecam 720 is rotatable or pivotable between the locked and unlocked position. In yet another exemplary aspect, thecam 720 defining thecam glide 733 serves the dual function of locking the divider or pusher to the rail and also enhancing the lateral slidability of the divider or pusher relative to the rail when the cam is in the unlocked position. - As shown in
Figure 92 , thecam 720 may define arounded portion 722 that is configured to rotate within acavity 741 in the front of the divider. Thecam 720 may also define acam surface 725 andcam surface 727 that will engage thegroove walls - In an embodiment, the
cam 720 fits within acavity 740 of thebarrier 556, as illustrated inFigure 86G . In an embodiment, thecavity 740 is bounded byside walls 742.Side walls 742 render the front of thecavity 740 slightly narrower than the width ofcam 720. An amount of force is required to pushcam 720past side walls 742 and intocavity 740. After the cam passes theside walls 742 it snaps into place in thecavity 740. Thecam 720 can then rotate incavity 740 and will not fall out ofcavity 740 or detach fromcavity 740 during normal use. Thecam 720 is rotatably secured withincavity 740. In an embodiment,cavity 740 also is bounded at its front portion by a front wall (not shown). - In another embodiment, the
side walls 742 do not render the front ofcavity 740 narrower than the width ofcam 720. In this embodiment,cam 720 may be placed intocavity 740 and removed fromcavity 740 without the need to overcome resistive force caused byside walls 742. - Referring to
Figure 92 , in another embodiment, thecam 720 defining acam glide 733 may fit within thecavity 741 formed at the front end of thedivider 550 and may be bounded byside walls 743.Side walls 743 render the front of thecavity 741 slightly narrower than the width ofcam 720. An amount of force is required to pushcam 720 past theside walls 743 and intocavity 741. After the cam passes theside walls 743 it snaps into place in thecavity 741 and seats on a pair of cavity surfaces 747. Thecam 720 can then rotate in the cavity and will not fall out of cavity or detach from the cavity during normal use. - As depicted in
Figures 92-94 , thecam 720 is rotatably secured withincavity 741. In this embodiment, thecavity 741 also defines an opening or slot 745 that is sized and shaped to permit rotatable movement of thecam glide 733 within the cavity. Theslot 745 is sized and shaped to permit the planar surface of thecam glide 733 to fit therein and to thereby permit the cam to rotate within thecavity 741. Theopening 745 also permits thecam glide 733 to extend past the bottom surface of the divider and into the rail. Once in the rail, the cam glide will lift the divider up and off of the rail and out of contact with the rail, as described above, to permit free slidability of the divider relative to the rail. - The
opening 745 also creates a clearance for the rotation of the cam glide away from the rail. When thehandle 732 on the cam is rotated toward the front edge of the rail, the cam glide will consequently rotate away from the rail. Theopening 745 formed within thecavity 741 permits this rotatable movement. - Referring to
Figures 93A and93B , thedivider 550 is shown being lowered and placed onto therail 580. More specifically, front portion of thedivider 550 is lower into thechannel 586 and thegroove 560 is placed over theridge 584. Thecam glide 733 will contact thechannel 586 and support the divider up and off of therail 580, as shown inFigure 93B . In this embodiment, thecam glide 733 supports the divider and permits free slidable movement of the divider relative to the rail. As shown inFigure 93B , there is a gap betweengroove 560 andridge 584 and between the underside surface of the divider and the top surface of rail. - Referring to
Figures 94A-94C , which shows sectional views of the divider, cam and rail, thecam 720 is at all times in contact with therail 580. As shown inFigure 94A , when thedivider 550 is initially lowered onto therail 580, thecam glide 733 is in contact with thechannel 586 of therail 580 and lifts the divider up and off of the rail. As shown inFigure 94A , thecam 720 defines cam surfaces 725, 727 and 729. The cam further defines acam handle 732 located opposite thecam glide 733. Also shown inFigure 94A is thefront rail 580 defining arail channel 586 which receives a portion of thedivider 550 and is the contact surface for thecam glide 733. Therail 580 further defines arail groove 750 that further definesgroove walls - Referring to
Figure 94B , as the cam is rotated, through operation of thehandle 732, the cam glide stays in contact with thechannel 586 and thecam surface 725 contacts the groove wall orsurface 756 of the front rail. At this point, thecam 720 contacts the rail at two points simultaneously. - Referring to
Figure 94C , as the cam is rotated even further through operation of the handle, thecam surface 725 contacts the groove wall orsurface 754 while thecam surface 727 contacts the groove wall orsurface 756. Also, thecam surface 729 will contact the groove wall orsurface 752. Thegroove wall 752 serves as a stop to prevent further rotational movement of thecam 720. Thehandle 732 extends over the top of and even with the front edge of the front rail or past the front edge of the front rail. In an example, front of cam handle 732 is flush with the forward most portion of front rail. Human digital clearance exists betweenhandle 732 and the front rail, sufficient for a human digit (i.e., a finger or thumb) to access the handle. At this point, thecam glide 733 has rotated up and off of thechannel 586 of therail 580 and has rotated into theopening 745. The divider now sits on and directly contacts the rail, while the cam engages the rail and secures the divider to the rail, preventing lateral movement of the divider. In an exemplary aspect, thecam 720 snaps to the rail with an audible notification heard with standard adult human hearing when in the position depicted inFigure 94C , indicating that the cam is locked to the rail. - To release the cam from the snapped-in-place or locked position, a user simply lifts upward on the
handle 732 to release the cam surfaces 725 and 727 from thegroove walls rail channel 586 and lift the divider up and off of the rail. The divider then will rest on the rail via the cam glide and may then be moved laterally relative to the rail, and the operation described above can be repeated. As indicated above, during the locking and releasing of the cam relative to the rail groove, the cam is at all times in contact with the rail and is at all times in contact with the divider. - In an exemplary aspect, the merchandise display system may include a front rail and at least one divider configured to engage the front rail. The divider may include a barrier, a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall configured to hold product, as set forth herein. A front lock, such as the
exemplary cam 720 described herein, may be coupled to the divider. In an aspect, the front lock is configured to rotate, pivot or move between a first position and a second position. When in the first position, the front lock may permit slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail. In one embodiment, the lock may lift the divider up off of the front rail. When in the second position, the lock locks the divider to the front rail and prevents slidable movement between the divider and the front rail. The cam is in constant contact with the front rail in both the first position and the second position, and all positions in between the first position and second position. - In an example, a lock for the divider, such as
cam 720 or other locks, is located at an end of divider. The lock can be located at the front end of the divider (i.e., the end of the divider closest to or in contact with thefront rail 580, which also is the end closest to the consumer selecting product). The lock, such ascam 720, can be forward of the divider wall 522. The lock, such ascam 720, can be forward ofbarrier 556. When located at the front end of the divider and in front of the divider wall 522 and in front ofbarrier 556, the lock is digitally accessible by an individual providing maintenance to the shelf, restocking the shelf or replanogramming the shelf, even when product is on thedivider floor 554 and even when thedivider floor 554 is full of product (i.e., no additional product can fit on the divider floor). The lock (such as cam 720) can be located on the divider such that the lock is in front of product when product is on thedivider floor 554 and product will not interfere with access to the lock in any position of the product when the product is on thedivider floor 554. The cam handle 732 can be flush with the front end of thefront rail 580 and can extend beyond the front end of thefront rail 580. - In an example, the merchandise display system may include a front rail, at least one divider configured to engage the front rail, and the at least one divider including a barrier. The at least one divider may further include a divider wall, and a divider floor perpendicular to the divider wall where the divider floor is configured to hold product. The merchandise display system also includes a front lock coupled to the front end of the divider. The front lock is in front of the barrier and in front of the divider wall. The front lock is configured to be digitally accessible when product is on the divider floor. The front lock is shiftable between a first position and a second position. The front lock lifts the divider up off of and out of contact with the front rail when in the first position and permits slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail. The front lock prevents slidable movement of the divider relative to the front rail when in the second position.
- In an example,
Figures 86E and86F illustrate magnified portions ofcam 720 andfront rail 580. Thecam 720 can include texturing.Cam 720 can include teeth or other engaging members. In an embodiment,first cam wall 726 is textured withteeth Teeth 736 can form a lower row of teeth.Teeth 738 can form an upper row of teeth.Teeth 736 andteeth 738 in an embodiment are rounded. In at least one embodiment,teeth 736 andteeth 738 form one vertical row of teeth. Eliminating the points on the teeth can provide for better operation and longer-life for the cam teeth.Cam 720 also can be textured in manners other than with teeth, such as through roughening or other texturing. - In an example,
front rail 580 includes agroove 750, as illustrated inFigure 86F . Thegroove 750 may include afirst groove wall 752, asecond groove wall 754 and athird groove wall 756.First groove wall 752 is connected tosecond groove wall 754, which in turn also is connected tothird groove wall 756. In another embodiment, thegroove 750 only has two groove walls. A first groove wall, such asfirst groove wall 752, and asecond groove wall 754. Thesecond groove wall 754 is straight and spans the length shown bygroove walls second groove wall 754 in this embodiment. - In an embodiment, groove 750 can be textured. Groove 750 can include teeth. In an embodiment,
first groove wall 752 includesteeth 766 andteeth 768.Teeth 766 can form a lower row of teeth.Teeth 768 can form an upper row of teeth. In at least one embodiment,teeth Teeth Teeth groove 750. In addition,teeth groove 750 with additional sections ofgroove 750 that are smooth and without teeth. Groove 750 also can be textured in manners other than with teeth, such as through roughening or other texturing. In an embodiment,second groove wall 754 is smooth andthird groove wall 756 is smooth. In an embodiment,second cam wall 728 is smooth andthird cam wall 730 is smooth. - In an embodiment, as shown in
Figures 87A-87C , amerchandise display system 10 comprises adivider 550 and afront rail 580. Thedivider 550 comprises adivider wall 556, adivider floor 554 and abarrier 554. Acam 720 is rotatably coupled to a front portion of thebarrier 556. Thecam 720 includes acam tongue 724, wherein thecam tongue 724 comprises afirst cam wall 726, asecond cam wall 728 and athird cam wall 730. Thecam 720 also includes ahandle 732. Thefront rail 580 comprises agroove 750 that is comprised of afirst groove wall 752, asecond groove wall 754 and athird groove wall 756. Thecam 720 is configured to rotate between a first position and a second position, wherein when thecam 720 is in the second position, thecam tongue 724 is engaged with thefront rail groove 750 and the divider wall 5560 is inhibited from moving in a lateral direction. Thecam 720 also can be configured to slide between a first position and a second position. -
Figures 87A-87C show a progression in which divider 550 is coupled tofront rail 580. Thecam 720 is moved between a first position inFigure 87B to a second position inFigure 87C . As described below, thecam 720 allows for thedivider 550 to be moved laterally along thefront rail 580 or otherwise parallel to thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the first position shown inFigure 87B . (InFigure 87B thedivider 550 is secured in the direction perpendicular to thefront rail 580 and cannot move in the perpendicular direction, other than for an insignificantly small amount of play that may exist between the divider and the front rail, which may not be noticeable to a user of the system.) Thecam 720 inhibits thedivider 550 from moving laterally along thefront rail 580 when thecam 720 is in the second position shown inFigure 87C . In an example, under normal operating conditions and forces, thecam 720 will prevent thedivider 550 from moving laterally along front rail 580 (and render thedivider 550 immovable along the front rail 580) when thecam 720 is in the second position shown inFigure 87C . In another example, thecam 720 inhibits movement of thedivider 550 by preventing thedivider 550 from moving laterally alongfront rail 580 when a force equal to or less than a predefined amount of force is applied to thedivider 550 in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580. When an amount of force above the predefined amount of force is applied to thedivider 550 in a lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580, thedivider 550 moves in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580. -
Figure 87A showsdivider 550 raised abovefront rail 580. InFigure 87B ,divider 550 has been lowered and placed into contact withfront rail 580.Groove 560 has been placed overridge 584 andridge 584 has been placed withgroove 560. Groove 560 andridge 584 may be in contact with each other in this position. Groove 560 andridge 584 also may not be in contact with each other at all times in this position. Space can exist between the surfaces ofgroove 560 andridge 584 in some positions. A front portion ofbarrier 556 also has been placed within channel orgroove 586. InFigure 87B , thetongue 724 ofcam 720 is not engaged with thegroove 750 offront rail 580. InFigure 87B , thedivider 550 can move in a lateral direction shown by arrow "A" inFigures 86F and86H .Divider 550 need not be raised abovefront rail 580 to enable such movement.Divider 550 can remain in contact withfront rail 580 and move in direction "A." Product may be placed on thedivider floor 554 during the process of movingdivider 550. The ability to movedivider 550 without separatingdivider 550 fromfront rail 580 or removing product provides for ease of replanogramming. InFigure 87B , thedivider 550 can move in the plane of the shelf (the shelf is shown as 596 inFigures 70 and71 ) only in the lateral direction parallel to thefront rail 580 shown by arrow "A" inFigures 86F and86H . InFigure 87B , thedivider 550 is immovable in all other directions in the plane of the shelf, such as the direction shown by arrow "B" inFigure 86H , under normal operating forces and conditions. Thedivider 550 cannot swing, rotate, splay or fish tail in the plane of the shelf and thedivider 550 remains perpendicular tofront rail 580 under normal operating forces and conditions. InFigure 87B , thedivider 550 can move in the direction shown by arrow "C" inFigure 87B and thereby lift away from thefront rail 580. The direction shown by arrow "C" inFigure 87B is not in the plane of the shelf. - In
Figure 87C , cam handle 732 has been rotated towardfront rail 580. In an embodiment, cam handle 732 is in contact withfront rail 580. As thecam 720 is rotated from its position inFigure 87B to its position inFigure 87C ,cam tongue 724 comes into contact with thefront rail 580 and slightly deforms thefront rail 580 away fromcam tongue 724. Camfirst wall 726 may be in contact with groovethird wall 756 as thecam 720 is being rotated from its position inFigure 87B to its positionFigure 87C . - As the cam moves into the position shown in
Figure 87C ,tongue 724 can snap into place withingroove 750 andtongue 724 is engaged withgroove 750. In an embodiment,tongue 724 is in perfect fit withgroove 750. This perfect fit involves engagement of thetongue 724 and thegroove 750.Front rail 580 is not deformed and thecam 720 and thefront rail 580 are not in tension with each other.First cam wall 726 is adjacentfirst groove wall 752.Second cam wall 728 is adjacentsecond groove wall 754.Third cam wall 730 is adjacentthird groove wall 756. In an embodiment, the cam walls and the groove walls are in contact with each other. For example,first cam wall 726 is in contact withfirst groove wall 752;second cam wall 728 is in contact withsecond groove wall 754; andthird cam wall 730 is in contact withthird groove wall 756. In at least one embodiment, while the cam walls and the groove walls are in contact with each other they are not in substantial tension with each other. In another embodiment, one or more of the cam walls are in tension with one or more of the groove walls when the cam walls and groove walls are in contact with each other. - In an embodiment where
first cam wall 726 has been placed in contact withfirst groove wall 752, the teeth offirst cam wall 726 engage the teeth offirst grove wall 752.Teeth 736 engageteeth 766 andteeth 738 engageteeth 768. The engagement of the teeth of the first cam wall and the teeth of the first groove wall provides resistance to the divider moving laterally along the front rail in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A" (as shown inFigure 86H ). - When
cam tongue 724 has been placed in perfect fit withgroove 750, there is substantial resistance to movement of thedivider 550 laterally along the front rail in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A," (as shown inFigure 86H ) and thedivider 550 will not move laterally under the normal forces placed on the divider during operation. - When it is desired to again move the
divider 550 alongfront rail 580, the cam can be unsnapped from the front rail. Handle 732 can be rotated away fromfront rail 580.Tongue 724 can disengage fromgroove 750 and return to its position inFigure 87B . - In an embodiment, the
divider wall 552 has sections of different width (seeFigure 85 ). Afront section 770 of thedivider wall 552 that can beadjacent barrier 556 can have a greater width than arear section 772 ofdivider wall 552 that isadjacent barrier 556.Front section 770 can be connected torear section 772 by anintermediate section 774. The width ofintermediate section 774 gradually changes from the width of thedivider front section 770 to the width of the dividerrear section 772. In an embodiment, the width of the portion of theintermediate section 774adjacent section 770 is equal to the width ofsection 770 and the width of the portion of theintermediate section 774adjacent section 772 is equal to the width ofsection 772. The lesser width ofrear section 772 ofdivider wall 552 creates air space betweendivider walls 552 and assists in preventing product from binding between twodivider walls 552 when being pushed and assists in providing for flow of product along thedivider floor 554 as product is removed from the front of themerchandise system 10. In an example, the width of thefront section 770 of thedivider wall 552 is at least 25% greater than the width of therear section 772 of thedivider wall 552. - In the embodiments shown in
Figures 85-87C one ormore dividers 550 can be placed into contact withfront rail 580. When thecam 720 or other engaging member is not engaged withfront rail 580, thedividers 550 can move parallel to the length offront rail 580 in the lateral direction shown by arrow "A" (seeFigure 86H ). Thedivider 550 can then be fixed into place by snapping thecam 720 or other engaging member into engagement withfront rail 580. Thedivider 550 will remain fixed under normal operating forces until thecam 720 or other engaging member is unsnapped or otherwise placed out of engagement withfront rail 580. - In an embodiment, the
front wall 561 ofgroove 560 is textured, as shown inFigure 86K . This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth. The texturing causes the surface of thefront wall 561 ofgroove 560 to not be smooth. In an embodiment,front wall 585 ofridge 584 or other protrusion or engaging member is textured, as depicted inFigures 86I, 86J , and86L . This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth and causes the surface offront wall 585 ofridge 584 to not be smooth. - In at least one embodiment, as depicted in
Figure 86I , thebarrier 556 is a separate component and may removably attached to thedivider 550. In at least one embodiment, thebarrier 556 may snap on to the front of thedivider 550. In at least one embodiment, thebarrier 556 is moveable. Theentire barrier 556 may be movable, or a portion or portions of thebarrier 556 may be moveable. For example, the portion of thebarrier 556 positioned in front of product on themerchandise display system 10 may be movable. In at least one embodiment, the portion of thebarrier 556 positioned in front of the product may be configured to slide. In an alternative embodiment, the portion of thebarrier 556 positioned in front of the product may be configured to rotate around an axis, to allow the portion of thebarrier 556 to open and close. In this embodiment, the axis may be a hinged connection. Additionally or alternatively, the portion of thebarrier 556 may be spring mounted to thedivider 550, such that the portion of thebarrier 556 requires an amount of force to move it away from thedivider 550. In this embodiment, upon release of the force, the portion of thebarrier 556 will close or return to its original position. Exemplary methods for mounting thebarrier 556 are described in further detail inU.S. Patent No. 8,056,734 , which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. - In an example, the
divider 550 does not include a barrier. Alternatively, one or more barriers may be included in thefront rail 580. - In an embodiment, when the
divider 550 is placed in contact with thefront rail 580, as shown inFigure 87B ,front wall 561 ofgroove 560 is not in contact with or not in consistent contact withfront wall 585 ofridge 584 while thecam 720 is in the position shown inFigure 87B and the tongue ofcam 720 is not engaged withgroove 750 offront rail 580. When thecam 720 is moved from a first position shown inFIG. 87B to a second position shown inFigure 97C , and thetongue 724 engages withgroove 750, the tongue can force thedivider 550 to move backward. In an embodiment, tension between thetongue 724 and thegroove 750 forces divider 550 to move in a rearward direction. When the cam is moved to the second position shown inFigure 87C front wall 561 ofgroove 560 comes into contact withfront wall 585 ofridge 584.Front wall 561 engages withfront wall 585. The texturing onfront wall 561 ofgroove 560 engages with the texturing onfront wall 585 ofridge 584. The engagement offront wall 561 ofgroove 560 withfront wall 585 ofridge 584 inhibits movement of thedivider 550 alongfront rail 580 in the direction shown by arrow "A" inFigure 86H . The engagement of the texturing onfront wall 561 ofgroove 560 with the texturing onfront wall 585 ofridge 584 further inhibits movement of thedivider 550 alongfront rail 580 in the direction shown by arrow "A" inFigure 86H . - In an example, a resilient strip or bead can be included into the top surface of
ridge 584, or other protrusion, offront rail 580. Whencam 720, or other engaging device, is in a first position, the resilient strip or bead is not compressed. In this first position, thedivider 550 can move in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail, but cannot move in a direction perpendicular to the front rail. Whencam 720, or other engaging device, is moved to a second position, the resilient strip or bead comes into compression withgroove 560, or other recess, ofdivider 550. When the resilient strip or bead is in compression withgroove 560, or other recess,divider 550 becomes fixed under normal operating forces in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580. In an example, the portion of thegroove 560, or other recess, that comes into contact with the resilient strip or bead offront rail 580 can include a roughening or teeth (not shown). - In an embodiment,
barrier 556 is not molded at the same time asdivider wall 552 anddivider floor 554.Barrier 556 is molded as a separate piece fromdivider wall 552 anddivider floor 556, as shown inFigure 88A .Barrier 556 may be molded of a clear material, whereasdivider wall 552 anddivider floor 554 may be molded of an opaque material. - In an example, a
divider 550 includes an engaging member that comprises a planar surface. Thefront rail 580 can include an engaging member that comprises a planar surface. The planar surface of the engaging member on the divider and/or the engaging member on the front rail can comprise a smooth or substantially smooth surface. The planar surface can include a resilient surface. The planar surface can include a rubber strip or a neoprene strip or material that is otherwise compressible. In an example, when the engaging member of thedivider 550 is in a first position it is not engaged with the engaging member of thefront rail 580 and thedivider 550 is movable laterally parallel to the front rail. When the engaging member of thedivider 550 is in a second position it is engaged with the engaging member of thefront rail 580 and the divider is fixed and not movable laterally parallel to the front rail under normal operating conditions and forces. In an example where the engaging members of thefront rail 580 and thedivider 550 are smooth or substantially smooth surfaces and do not include teeth or other protrusions, thedivider 550 can have additional lateral adjustability and infinite or near infinite lateral adjustability. The lateral adjustability of thedivider 550 is not limited by the physical dimensions, such as width, of projections or teeth. Infinite lateral adjustability provides significant benefits to display systems by efficiently utilizing lateral space and limiting or minimizing unused or lost space between product rows and thereby potentially increasing the amount of usable space and lateral product facings on a shelf. - In an embodiment,
barrier 556 can be snap fit or otherwise engaged withdivider 550, as shown inFigure 88B . The engagement betweenbarrier 556 anddivider 550 can be such thatbarrier 556 cannot be removed fromdivider 550 under normal operating conditions and without deleteriously affecting the structure ofbarrier 556 ordivider 550. -
Figures 89A-89C show an example of a step by step approach to placement of a divider in a front rail. In the initial step, as illustrated inFigure 89A , thedivider 550 may be lowered into contact with thefront rail 590. A rotating "T"lock 900 may be rotated to snap over thefront rail 580. The rotating "T"lock 900 may be attached to a front portion of thedivider 550. The rotating "T"lock 900 may rotate around anaxis 903. Thedivider 550 may be lowered and placed in contact with thefront rail 580, as illustrated inFigure 89B . Thegroove 560 or other recess of thedivider 550 engages the ridge ortongue 584 or other protrusion of thefront rail 580. At this point thedivider 550 can be moved in a lateral direction parallel to the front rail and can allow for ease of replanogramming. In an example thedivider 550 can move along the front rail. Thedivider 550, with or without product on thedivider floor 554, can be slid in the direction previously noted by arrow "A" inFigure 65 , without requiring that thedivider 550 be lifted up. In the final step, as illustrated inFigure 89C , the rotating "T"lock 900 may be pushed forward and downwardly toward thefront rail 580. The rotating "T"lock 900 may engage with alip 901 on a front portion of thefront rail 580. In at least one embodiment, thefront rail 580 includes a topfront surface 902. The topfront surface 902 may include a texture or may be a resilient surface, such as rubber. Alternatively, the topfront surface 902 may include one or more teeth. The topfront surface 902 may engage with asurface 904 on the rotating "T"lock 900. Thesurface 904 may also include a texture or may be a resilient surface, such as rubber. Alternatively, thesurface 904 may include teeth configured to engage the teeth on the topfront surface 902. When the rotating "T"lock 900 engageslip 901, thedivider 550 is engaged to thefront rail 580 and cannot move in a lateral direction under a normal amount of force. -
Figures 90A-90F illustrate embodiments of thedivider 550 andfront rail 580. As shown inFigure 90A , adivider 550 may includewall 552, afloor 554 and abarrier 556. Thedivider wall 552 may divide thedivider floor 554 into two portions, 559 and 551 with one portion on each side of thedivider wall 552. As illustrated inFigure 90B , thedivider wall 552 may extend perpendicularly from thedivider floor 554. Thebarrier 556 may be located at the front of thedivider wall 552. As illustrated inFigures 90C and90F , the bottom surface of thedivider floor 554 may include agroove 560 or other recess, atongue 941 or other protrusion, and afront wall 561. In at least one embodiment, thefront wall 561 ofgroove 560 is textured. This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth. The texturing may cause the surface of thefront wall 561 ofgroove 560 to not be smooth. - As illustrated in
Figure 90D , afront rail 580 can define aplanar surface 582, a ridge ortongue 584 or other projection, a first channel or groove 586 or other recess, and a second channel or groove 950 or other recess. Thefront wall 561 of thedivider 550 may engage thefirst groove 586 of thefront rail 580. The ridge ortongue 584 of thefront rail 580 may engage thegroove 560 of thedivider 550. Thetongue 941 of thedivider 550 may engage thesecond groove 950 of thefront rail 580. In an embodiment,front wall 585 ofridge 584 is textured. This texturing can be in the form of roughening or small teeth and causes the surface offront wall 585 ofridge 584 to not be smooth. The texturing of thefront wall 585 of theridge 584 may engage with the texturing of thefront wall 561 ofgroove 560. The engagement of thefront wall 561 of thedivider 550 to thefirst channel 586 of thefront rail 580, the engagement of the ridge ortongue 584 of thefront rail 580 to thegroove 560 of thedivider 550, and the engagement of theprojection 941 of thedivider 550 to thesecond groove 950 of thefront rail 580 may keep thedivider wall 552 perpendicular to thefront rail 580 and prevent a back portion of thedivider 550 from splaying. In at least one embodiment, thedivider 550 may be moved laterally parallel to and/or along thefront rail 580 when thedivider 550 receives a lateral force. - The
front rail 580 may includeapertures 951 andopenings 952, as illustrated inFigure 90E . Theapertures 951 may be configured to engage with corresponding engagement projections (not shown). In an example, the engagement projection can be a flat splicer. The corresponding engagement projections may connect one or morefront rails 580 together in series. The connection of theapertures 951 and engagement projections can allow for one or morefront rails 580 to be connected in series, even if thefront rails 580 are not in perfect alignment with each other. Theopenings 952 may be configured to receive fasteners, which fasten thefront rail 580 to a display shelf. Thefront rail 580 may include any number ofopening 952 suitable for securing thefront rail 580 to a display shelf. Any type of fastener may be contemplated within the scope of the invention. - In an example, as illustrated in
Figure 91A , themerchandise display system 10 may include aback rail 810. Theback rail 810 can be located at or near the back of a shelf. Theback rail 810 may be a similar construction as thefront rail 580 and the disclosure herein regarding thefront rail 580 applies equally to theback rail 810. For example, theback rail 810 may include arecess 804, which may generally be in the shape of a "u". In this embodiment, thedividers 550 may be connected to divider blocks 802. The divider blocks 802 may then engage with theback rail 810. Theback rail 810 can be a second rail in the merchandise display system, along with thefront rail 580. Theback rail 810 also can be the only rail in the merchandise display system. As noted above,front rail 580 can be located at the rear of the merchandise display system and thereby function as aback rail 810. In at least one embodiment, the plurality of divider blocks 802 each has a cam 710 (not shown inFigure 91A ) in the location denoted by the arrow inFigure 91A . Thiscam 720 can rotate from a first position to a second position and have the same effect as thecam 720 in the divider that engages with thefront rail 580. The divider blocks 802 also can include other engaging devices, including the engaging devices described herein for thedivider 550, that engage with theback rail 810. The use of theback rail 810 may keep the back of thedividers 550 in position and prevent product from moving to a position behind thepusher 520. To unlock thedividers 550 from theback rail 810, the 720 or other engaging device is rotated away from theback rail 810 or otherwise disengaged with theback rail 810. - In an example, a
divider 550 can be placed into contact with afront rail 580. Groove 560 can be placed overridge 584 andridge 584 can be placed withingroove 560. Groove 560 andridge 584 can be in contact with each other in this position.Divider 550 also can be placed into contact withrear rail 810. A groove or other recess in thedivider 550 can be placed over a ridge or other protrusion ofrear rail 810 and the ridge or protrusion of therear rail 810 can be placed within a groove or other recess ofdivider 550.Divider 550 can be in contact withfront rail 580 andrear rail 810 at the same time. An engagement device, such ascam 720, on the front of the divider can be in a position such that thedivider 550 can move laterally parallel to thefront rail 580 and therear rail 810, but thedivider 550 is immovable in a direction perpendicular tofront rail 580 or rear rail 810 (the direction betweenfront rail 580 and rear rail 810). Thedivider block 802 also can include an engagement device (not shown), such ascam 720 or other engagement devices described above with respect to thefront rail 810. The engagement device ondivider block 802 can be in a position such that thedivider 550 can move laterally parallel to thefront rail 580 and therear rail 810, but thedivider 550 is fixed in a direction perpendicular tofront rail 580 or rear rail 810 (the direction betweenfront rail 580 and rear rail 810). - In an example, the engagement device on the front of the
divider 550 can be moved to a second position. In the second position thedivider 550 is fixed in a direction parallel to thefront rail 580 under normal operating forces. The engagement device ondivider block 802 also can be moved to a second position. In the second position, the engagement device ondivider block 802 renders thedivider 550 fixed in a direction parallel to therear rail 810 under normal operating forces. Thefront rail 580,divider 550 andrear rail 810 can form a rigid tray that may be moved as a unit from one location to another. Thefront rail 580,rear rail 810 and a plurality ofdividers 550 can be preassembled and formed into a rigid tray in a location away from the shelf. Thefront rail 580,rear rail 810 and a plurality ofdividers 550 can then be moved to the shelf and secured to the shelf by one or more fasteners. - In an embodiment, a merchandise display system can include a barrier that is moveable by rotation between a folded position and an upright position without the aid of, for example, a rotation biasing element (such as a spring loaded hinge) dedicated to biasing the barrier into the upright position. Various example aspects of example systems that can include a barrier that is moveable between a folded position and an upright position without the aid of a rotation biasing element are shown in
Figures 95-106 . In an embodiment, the system can include adivider assembly 550 configured to be secured to a support structure. As used herein, adivider assembly 550 can also be referred to as adivider 550. A support structure can include, for example, afront rail 580. In an embodiment, adivider 550 can includeforward end 553 and arearward end 555. Movement in the forward direction as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier is defined by movement from therearward end 555 toward theforward end 553. For example, the arrow F depicted inFigures 99B and100D is pointing toward the forward direction. Movement in the rearward direction as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier is defined by movement from theforward end 553 toward therearward end 555. For example, the arrow R depicted inFigures 99A and100C is pointing toward the rearward direction. Movement in a lateral direction as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier is defined by movement in the directions shown, by example, by arrow A inFigures 65 ,100A , and103A . In an embodiment, adivider 550 can include adivider wall 552 having aright side surface 552a and aleft side surface 552b. In an embodiment, thedivider wall 552 can extend from theforward end 553 of thedivider 550 to therearward end 555. In an embodiment, thedivider wall 552 can extend upwardly from adivider floor 554. The divider floor can include atop surface 554a and abottom surface 554b. In an embodiment, thedivider wall 552 separates thedivider floor 554 into afirst side portion 559 and asecond side portion 551 on each side of thedivider 550. Thefirst side portion 559 of thedivider floor 554 can also be referred to as theright side portion 559 of thedivider floor 554 and thesecond side portion 551 can also be referred to as theleft side portion 551 of thedivider floor 554. - In an embodiment,
barriers 556 are moveable by rotation between a folded position, as shown by example inFigure 96B for thebarrier 556a on the right side of the divider, to an upright position, as shown by example inFigure 96A for bothbarriers barriers 556 can be connected to arotational mounting structure 563. In an embodiment, therotational mounting structure 563 can be directly connected to the divider. In an embodiment, as discussed below in reference to examples shown inFigures 102 and103 , therotational mounting structure 563 can be removably connected to the divider. Referring toFigure 97 , in an embodiment, therotational mounting structure 563 can be aknuckle 565 and pin 566 type hinge. In an embodiment, therotational mounting structure 563 can be a flexible member, such as flexible polymer or metal component. - In an embodiment,
barrier 556 can be considered positioned proximate theforward end 553 of thedivider 550 when a product positioned on thetop surface 554a of thedivider floor 554 can contact thebarrier 556 when the product moves in the forward direction toward theforward end 553 of thedivider 550. In an embodiment, therotational mounting structure 563 is proximate to and connected to theforward end 553 of thedivider 550 and/or thedivider floor 554. For example, referring toFigures 95 ,96A, and 96B , thebarrier 556a is shown positioned proximate to and is connected to theforward end 553 of thedivider 550 and thedivider floor 554. In an embodiment, thebarrier 556 can be positioned proximate to theforward end 553 of thedivider 550 and/or thedivider floor 554 while being spaced from and/or not being directly connected to either theforward end 553 or the divider floor 554 (not shown). For example, in an embodiment, the barrier can be removably connected to thefront rail 580 and not connected to thedivider 550 but positioned close enough to the divider such that a product positioned on the top surface 55a of thedivider floor 554 can contact thebarrier 556 when the product moves in the forward direction (not shown). In such example, thebarrier 556 can be considered positioned proximate theforward end 553 of thedivider 550. In an embodiment, thebarrier 556 can be positioned proximate to the forward end of the divider and be connected to the divider wall. In an embodiment, the barrier can fold toward the divider wall when moving toward the folded position (not shown). - Referring to
Figures 98A-98C , in an embodiment, thebarrier 556 is configured to rotate between an upright position and a folded position. An example upright position is shown inFigure 98A and an example folded position is shown inFigure 98C . In an embodiment, thetop edge 568 of thebarrier 556 can rotate along the arc shown as B inFigure 98A . For example, a force applied in the rearward direction R to abarrier 556 in the upright position can cause the barrier to rotate toward the folded position, as shown inFigure 98B , to reach the folded position as shown by example inFigure 98C . In addition, for example, thebarrier 556 can be rotated manually by digitally pulling or pushing the barrier handle 567 to, respectively, raise the barrier to the upright position or lower the barrier to the folded position. In an embodiment, thetop edge 568 of thebarrier 556 can rotate along the entire arc of B and C such that the top edge contacts the top surface of the divider floor (not shown). - In an embodiment, in the folded position, the
barrier 556 defines a folded angle C in between arear surface 569 of the barrier and thetop surface 554a of the divider floor. In an embodiment, the folded angle C is between about 45 degrees to about 20 degrees. In another embodiment, the folded angle C is between about 30 degrees and 15 degrees. The term "about" as used herein in regard to embodiments including a rotational barrier means plus or minus 5% of the stated value. In an embodiment, the folded angle is about 20 degrees. - In an embodiment, a
folding stop structure 570 is configured to stop rotation of thebarrier 556 toward thedivider floor 554 and maintain the barrier at a desired folded angle C in the folded position. In an embodiment, thefolding stop structure 570 is a protrusion positioned proximate a lower portion of therear surface 569 of the barrier. In an embodiment, the folding stop structure is connected to thetop surface 554a of the divider floor such that thelower portion 587 of the rear surface of the barrier contacts thefolding stop structure 570 when barrier reaches the folded angle C in the folded position. In an embodiment, the folding stop structure is connected to the lower portion of the rear surface of the barrier so that the folding stop structure contacts the top surface of the divider floor when the barrier reaches the desired folded angle in the folded position (not shown). In an embodiment, the folding stop structure is an extension or plateau or plate secured to or integral with thedivider floor 554. In an embodiment, the divider floor prevents thebarrier 556 from becoming completely horizontal. Thebarrier 556 is configured such that when thebarrier 556 is rotated to the folded position, the barrier is at an angle from horizontal. This angle can be about 10 degrees, 15 degrees, 20 degrees or between about 20-45 degrees or between about 10-35 degrees. In an embodiment, the barrier has a horizontal portion and a vertical portion that allow thebarrier 556 to be at a predetermined angle to the divider floor when thebarrier 556 is in contact with thedivider floor 554. In an example, thestop structure 570 does not exist and thebarrier 556 contacts thedivider floor 554 directly on the horizontaltop surface 554a of the divider floor. - Referring to
Figures 99A-99C , in an embodiment, a force applied in the forward direction to a product positioned in contact with at least a portion of therear surface 569 of thebarrier 556 while the barrier is in the folded position can cause the barrier to rotate from the folded position to the upright position. For example, referring toFigure 99A , a product can be placed on thetop surface 554a of thedivider floor 554 while the barrier is in the folded position. In an embodiment, a force can be applied to the product to move the product in the forward direction toward the barrier, as shown by example inFigure 99B . In an embodiment, the force is gravity. For example, adivider 550 positioned so that theforward end 553 is angled downwardly relative to the rearward end can cause products positioned thereon to move by gravity alone toward theforward end 553. In an embodiment, the force can be applied by apusher mechanism 520. In an embodiment, thepusher mechanism 520 can be biased in the forward direction and can be configured to slide across the divider floor and move the product in the forward direction. In an embodiment, thetop edge 568 of therear surface 569 of the barrier is rounded off or defines a curved or radiused surface. The rounded edge of the top of the rear surface of the barrier assists in rotation of the barrier by, for example, allowing thebarrier 556 to slip or slide up the surface of the product as the movement vector of the barrier changes while rotating toward the upright position as the product moves forward. In addition, for example, the rounded edge prevents the edge from digging into the surface of the product packaging and maintains a low friction between the rounded edge and the product as the product moves forward and the rounded edge moves up the surface of the product. In an embodiment, the top of the barrier can include other structures to facilitate the sliding of the barrier up the surface of the product such as, for example, a roller structure. In an embodiment, when the barrier reaches the upright position, the barrier ceases rotation and ceases movement of the product in the forward direction. In an embodiment, a vertical stop structure is configured to stop rotation of the barrier in the forward position and establish the upright position of the barrier. In an embodiment, the vertical stop structure can be avertical surface 571 on the rotational mounting structure and an opposingvertical surface 572 on thebarrier 556. - Referring to
Figures 100A-100D , in an embodiment, aspects of a rotational barrier described in the examples above can be used, for example, in an embodiment of merchandise display system that includes a pair ofdividers pusher mechanism 520. Thedividers product pocket 573 in between the opposing walls of the dividers. Theproduct pocket 573 can, for example, have a width that is slightly greater than a product which is intended to be displayed in the system. In an embodiment, the barriers can be positioned in the folded position as shown inFigure 100B to facilitate placement of the product in the system. In addition, in an embodiment, manual positioning of a product against thefront surface 556f of the barriers in the upright position and pushing of the product in the rearward direction against thefront surface 556f of the barriers can cause the barriers to rotate to the folded position and allow the product to be easily inserted into theproduct pocket 573 as shown inFigure 100C . In an embodiment, once the product is positioned in the product pocket on the top surfaces of the divider floors and against the front surface of the pusher mechanism, and then released, the pusher mechanism pushes the product in a forward direction F and causes the product to rotate the barriers from the folded position to the upright position, as shown inFigure 100D , where the forward movement of the product is then ceased. - In an embodiment, the
rotational mounting structure 563 can be removably connected to thedivider 550,front rail 580, orshelf 234. In an embodiment, therotational mounting structure 563 is removably connected to theforward end 553 of thedivider 550. Referring toFigures 102A-102D and103A-103E , an example removablerotational mounting structure 563 can include avertical stanchion 591,horizontal cross beam 593, androtational mounts horizontal cross beam 593. In an embodiment, thevertical stanchion 591 can be an elongate post oriented in the vertical direction and thehorizontal cross beam 593 can be an elongate beam oriented horizontally in the lateral direction. In an embodiment, the stanchion can include a gripping structure near the top portion of the stanchion to facilitate manual insertion and removal of therotational mounting structure 563 onto or off of thedivider 550. In an embodiment, thehorizontal cross beam 593 is connected to thevertical stanchion 591 and extends from the opposite sides of the vertical stanchion in a cross-like manner such that aleft section 593b of thehorizontal cross beam 593 extends in a lateral direction from aleft side 591b of thevertical stanchion 591 and aright section 593a of thehorizontal cross beam 593 extends in the lateral direction from aright side 591a of thevertical stanchion 591. In an embodiment, a rightrotational mount 597a is connected to theright section 593a of thehorizontal cross beam 593 and a leftrotational mount 597b is connected to the left section 53b of thehorizontal cross beam 593. In an embodiment, eachsection respective side portions divider floor 554. - In an embodiment, a rotational mount can include a knuckle and pin type hinge or flexible member. In an embodiment wherein a
rotational mount 597a is a knuckle and pin hinge, therotational mount 597a can include afirst knuckle component 601 and the barrier can include asecond knuckle component 602, the first and second knuckle components are complimentary such that apin 566 can extend through the first and second knuckle components to form a hinge for rotational attachment of thebarrier 556a to therotational mount 597a androtational mounting structure 563. - In an embodiment, a
rotational mount 597a includes afolding stop structure 570a configured to stop rotation of thebarrier 556a toward thedivider floor 554a and maintain the desired folded angle C for the folded position. In an embodiment, thefolding stop structure 570a is aplate 603 extending from and integral with therotational mount 597a orhorizontal cross beam 593a, theplate 603 having a raised orangled portion 615 configured to define the folded angle C. In an embodiment, as described above, the folding stop structure is connected to the lower portion of therear surface 569 of the barrier so that the folding stop structure contacts the top surface of thedivider floor 554 orplate 603 when the barrier reaches the desired folded angle in the folded position (not shown). In an embodiment, the folding stop structure is integral with the divider floor. - In an embodiment, a
rotational mount 597a includes a vertical stop structure configured to stop rotation of the barrier in the forward position and establish the upright position of the barrier. In an embodiment, the vertical stop structure can be avertical surface 571 on the rotational mount and an opposingvertical surface 572 on thebarrier 556. In an embodiment, the vertical surface of the vertical stop structure of the rotational mount can be within amount recess 604 defined within therotational mount 597a and the opposingvertical surface 572 on thebarrier 556 can be on atab 605 formed on the bottom portion of the barrier. Themount recess 604 can be of complimentary shape with thetab 605 so that the tab fits into themount recess 604 when the barrier rotates in the forward direction. - In an embodiment, the
stanchion 591 can include amount slot 598 defined in the stanchion which is configured to mate with afront ridge 599 of thedivider 550 to removably connect therotational mounting structure 563 to theforward end 553 of thedivider 550. In an embodiment, the rotational mounting structure removably connects to the divider using clip, cam, or other coupling structure. - In an embodiment, referring to
Figures 104A-104G , an example removablerotational mounting structure 563 can include ahorizontal cross beam 593 androtational mounts horizontal cross beam 593. In an embodiment, thehorizontal cross beam 593 extends in a lateral direction and has a length about equal to the width ofrespective side portions divider floor 554. In an embodiment, a rightrotational mount 597a is connected to aright section 593a of thehorizontal cross beam 593 and a leftrotational mount 597b is connected to aleft section 593b of thehorizontal cross beam 593. In an embodiment, as shown inFigures 104A-104G , thehorizontal cross beam 593 is configured to have a low-profile where the height of the beam over thedivider block 802 is minimized. A low-profilehorizontal cross beam 593 can provide for more space for product to be inserted over the removablerotational mounting structure 563 from the forward direction into the merchandise display system. - In an embodiment, the
horizontal cross beam 593 can include aforward extension 593c of the horizontal cross beam that extends toward the front of thedivider block 802. In an embodiment, theforward extension 593c of thehorizontal cross beam 593 can extend forward of the front of thedivider block 802 and include anextension hook 593e configured to extend downward from the forward end of the forward extension so that the extension hook is positioned in front of thedivider block 802 when the removable mounting structure is secured in place on the divider. In an embodiment, the rotational mounting structure includes aforward extension 593c andextension hook 593e extending from aright section 593a of thehorizontal cross beam 593 and aforward extension 593d andextension hook 593f extending from aleft section 593b of thehorizontal cross beam 593. Theforward extensions - In an embodiment, the
removable mounting structure 563 includes afirst plate 603a extending from the rightrotational mount 597a orright section 593a of thehorizontal cross beam 593 and asecond plate 603b extending from the leftrotational mount 597b orleft section 593b of thehorizontal cross beam 593. In an embodiment, theplates rotational mounts plates mount slot 598 configured to mate theremovable mounting structure 563 with thefront ridge 599 of thedivider 550 to removably connect therotational mounting structure 563 to theforward end 553 of thedivider 550. In an embodiment, eachplate folding stop structure angled portion - Referring to
Figures 105A-105D , in an embodiment, thebarrier 556 includes aresilient tab 606 configured to engage atab recess 604a defined in therotational mount 597 when the barrier reaches the upright position, as shown inFigure 105B . Theresilient tab 606 is configured to hold the barrier in the upright position when it engagestab recess 604a. In an embodiment, thetab recess 604a is defined in themount recess 604. In an embodiment, when a rearward force is applied to the barrier, theresilient tab 606 flexes and disengages from thetab recess 604a so that the barrier can move toward the folded position, shown inFigure 105D . In an embodiment, themount recess 604 includes afolding stop structure 604b. In an embodiment, the tab resilient 606 engages the folding stop structure to stop rotation of thebarrier 556 toward thedivider floor 554 and maintain the desired folded angle of the folded position. In an embodiment, thefolding stop structure 604b is defined in themount recess 604 and can be, for example, an angled portion as shown inFigure 105A . - Referring to
Figures 106A and106B , example aspects of an example system that can include a barrier moveable between a folded position and an upright position without the aid of a rotation biasing element are shown. In an embodiment, a system can include adivider assembly 550 configured to be secured to a support structure, such as a front rail. In an embodiment, thedivider wall 552 can include adivider wall extension 552a configured to increase the height of the divider wall. In an embodiment, thedivider wall extension 552a and thedivider wall 552 can include tongue and groove components configured to secure the extension to the divider wall. In an embodiment, thefront edge 552d of the divider wall can be rounded. The rounded edge can, for example, prevent a product package from catching on the edge and tearing. In addition, the thickness of divider wall can be increased to improve the strength of the wall and, for example, accommodate the tongue and groove components for the divider wall extension. Examples of systems that use divider walls of increased thickness can be useful for heavier products, such as cases of canned soda, which may require more robust aspects of a display system than smaller, lighter products. In an embodiment, the width of the system and barriers can be increased to, for example, accommodate larger products that may require more shelf space. In an embodiment, as shown inFigure 106B , thefolding stop structure 570 is defined in thedivider floor 554. - In an embodiment, an example method of restocking a merchandise display system is described in reference to
Figures 100A-100D . As shown inFigure 100A , a merchandise display system can include afirst divider 550a andsecond divider 550b. The first and second divider can also be referred to as aleft side divider 550a and aright side divider 550b. The first and second dividers can include first and second divider walls that extend from the forward end to the rearward end of the respective dividers. Aproduct pocket 573 can be defined in between the opposing first and second divider walls. The first divider can include afirst barrier 556c positioned at the forward end of thedivider 550a and to the right of the first divider wall. And, thesecond divider 550b can include abarrier 556d positioned at the forward end of the second divider and to the left of the second divider wall. The system can include apusher 520 positioned in between the first and second dividers. The pusher can include a biasing element which biases the pusher in the forward direction F toward the forward ends of the dividers. Thebarriers Figure 100A . Referring toFigure 100B , thebarriers Figure 100C , the product can be positioned forward the product pusher and in contact with the front surface of the product pusher so that the product pusher is in position to move the product forward when the product is released. Once the product is released, thepusher 520 moves the product forward so that the product contacts the barriers. When the barriers are in the second, folded position and the product is in the product pocket and released, the pusher can push the product forward so that the product contacts the barriers and moves the barriers from the second, folded position to the first, upright position. The barriers cease the forward movement of the pusher and the product when the barriers reach the first, upright position, as shown inFigure 100D . In an embodiment, the product can be positioned in the product pocket by moving the product over barriers which are positioned in the first, upright position. In such example, the pusher can move the product forward until the product contacts the barriers which are in the first, upright position - where then the forward movement of the product will be stopped, as shown inFigure 100D . - Referring to
Figures 101A-101F , in an embodiment, a merchandise display system including rotational barriers described above can be used in conjunction with an improved product tray to facilitate efficient stocking of product in the merchandise display system. Referring toFigures 101A and 101B , in an embodiment, animproved product tray 578 can include abottom surface 574,right side wall 575,left side wall 576, and analignment flap 577. In an embodiment, thealignment flap 577 can have aproximate end 579, adistal end 581, aright edge 583, and aleft edge 587. A flap width D of thealignment flap 577 can be defined in between theright edge 583 and theleft edge 587 of thealignment flap 577. In an embodiment, the flap width D is about equal to the width of the product in theproduct tray 578. In an embodiment, the length of the alignment flap is defined in a direction perpendicular to the width D. In an embodiment, the length of the alignment flap can vary. In an embodiment, the length of the alignment flap can be about equal to the height of thebarrier 556 or the height of the product. In an embodiment, theproximate end 579 of the alignment flap is configured to be connected to thebottom surface 574 of the product tray. In an embodiment, thealignment flap 577 is configured to be positioned in between opposing divider walls of a merchandise display system such that the alignment flap aligns the product tray and the product stored in the product tray with the product pocket so that the product stored in the product tray can be slid from within the product tray, as shown inFigure 101D , directly into the product pocket of the merchandise display system, as shown inFigure 101E . In an embodiment, a portion of the alignment flap can be tapered toward the distal end to aid in insertion of the alignment flap between the opposing divider walls of the system. In an embodiment, the alignment flap can be used to move the barriers from the upright position to the folded position to facilitate sliding of the product from the product tray into the product pocket of the system. In an embodiment, the alignment flap is positioned within the product pocket such that the alignment flap moves the barriers from the upright position to the folded position (as shown inFigures 101C and101D ), product can then be slid from the product tray into the product pocket of the system (as shown inFigure 101E ), and the alignment flap is removed from the product pocket and removed from contact with the barriers. In such embodiment, in an embodiment with a pusher (as shown inFigure 101E ), the pusher can then push the product forward so that the forward-most product contacts the barriers and moves the barriers from the folded position to the upright position. When the barriers reach the upright position, rotation of the barriers ceases and forward movement of the product is stopped so that the forward most product is positioned in the forward-most position in the display system (as shown inFigure 101F ). In such example, the alignment flap is used to temporarily move the barriers from the upright position to the folded position for stocking of the system. In an embodiment, the barriers can be physically removed from the system so that the system may be stocked with product. In an embodiment, the barriers can be configured to rotate from the upright position toward the forward direction so that, for example, the top of the barrier extends beyond the front end of the divider in the forward direction. Such position can be referred to as a forward folded position. In an embodiment, the barrier can be configured to rotate from the folded position, to the upright position, and beyond the front end of the divider in the forward direction to reach the forward folded position (not shown). In an embodiment, a barrier that can rotate in the forward direction beyond the forward end of the divider can include a rotational stop and define angles relative to the divider floor as described above in regard to barriers that rotate only between the upright position and folded position as described above. In an embodiment, the barriers can be configured to slide in the lateral direction, left and/or right. In an embodiment, the barriers can be manually positioned in the folded position, upright position, and/or folded forward position. - In an example, an
unbiased barrier 556 is connected to adivider floor 554. Theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to be adjustable from a first position to a second position. In a first position, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to inhibit or prevent product on thedivider floor 554 from moving beyond the front edge of thedivider 550. In a first position, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to inhibit product from being placed onto thedivider floor 554. In a first position, the unbiased barrier is configured to be vertical. In a second position, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to allow product to be placed onto thedivider floor 554. In the second position the unbiased barrier is horizontal or diagonal in respect to thedivider floor 554 or shelf or other structure on which thedivider 550 resides. In aspects, in the second position theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to be horizontal to thedivider floor 554, or the shelf or other structure on which theunbiased barrier 556 resides; or theunbiased barrier 556, in the second position, is configured to be rotated or adjusted at a horizontal angle from thedivider floor 554. The horizontal angle from thedivider floor 554 can be 20 degrees, can be between approximately 10 and 30 degrees, or can be between approximately 20 and 45 degrees. In an embodiment, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to have no spring or other biasing element forcing it between a first position and a second position. In an embodiment, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to be freely adjustable from the first position to the second position. In an embodiment, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured such that it can be moved to the first position and will remain in the first position and can be moved to the second position and will remain in the second position. In an embodiment, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured to be unbiased and to include no biasing mechanism such as a spring or other device that places a force on theunbiased barrier 556 to force the unbiased barrier into the first position or the second position. - In various embodiments, including example embodiments as in the previous paragraph, external objects, such as product shown in
Figures 99A-99C or aproduct tray 578 oralignment flap 577 or a wall of theproduct tray 578 shown inFigures 101A-101C or a hand or digit of a human, can move or force theunbiased barrier 556 from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position. Product or atray 578 oralignment flap 577 or a human digit can exert a force on theunbiased barrier 556 such that theunbiased barrier 556 moves from a first position which is substantially vertical to thedivider floor 554 to a second position which is diagonal or a second position which is substantially horizontal. In the second position, theunbiased barrier 556 is configured so that product can be placed onto thedivider floor 554 and allow for product to be restocked in a prompt manner. After the product has been restocked onto thedivider floor 554, apusher 520 exerts a force on the product in the direction toward the front of thedivider 550 and the front of the product shelf or other structure on which thedivider 550 is residing. The pusher can be a spring-urged pusher in which a spring or other biasing unit exerts a force on the pusher, biasing it toward the front of thedivider 550. The spring or other biasing unit is not physically connected to or in direct contact with theunbiased barrier 556. The product in turn exerts a force on theunbiased barrier 554 that forces the biased barrier into a first position. In the first position, the unbiased barrier prevents the product from moving beyond the front edge of thedivider 550 or shelf or other structure on which thedivider 550 is secured. - In an embodiment, multiple products can be positioned in the product pocket of the system. A consumer can, for example, remove the forward-most product. In such case, for example, the pusher can push the remaining product in the product pocket forward so that the next product in line contacts the barriers and forward movement of the product stops. In such case, a product in the forward-most position is replaced with next product in line, thereby maintaining product in the forward-most position until the product in the
pocket 573 runs out. - Variations and modifications of the foregoing are within the scope of the present invention. For example, one of skill in the art will understand that multiples of the described components may be used in stores and in various configurations. The present invention is therefore not to be limited to a single system, nor the upright pusher configuration, depicted in the Figures, as the system is simply illustrative of the features, teachings and principles of the invention. It should further be understood that the invention disclosed and defined herein extends to all alternative combinations of two or more of the individual features mentioned or evident from the text and/or drawings. All of these different combinations constitute various alternative aspects of the present invention. The embodiments described herein explain the best modes known for practicing the invention and will enable others skilled in the art to utilize the invention.
Claims (15)
- A merchandise display system comprising:a divider (550) configured to be secured to a support structure, wherein the divider (550) includes a forward end (553) and a rearward end (555);the divider (550) includes a divider wall (552) and a divider floor (554), the divider wall (552) extending upwardly from the divider floor (554), the divider floor (554) includes a top surface (554a); characterised byan unbiased barrier (556) that is moveable by rotation between a folded position and an upright position, the unbiased barrier (556) positioned proximate the forward end (553) of the divider (550) such that a product positioned on the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) contacts the unbiased barrier (556) when the product moves toward the forward end (553) of the divider (550);wherein the unbiased barrier (556) is configured to rotate from the folded position to the upright position, wherein when a product positioned on the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) moves toward the forward end (553) of the divider (550) and contacts the unbiased barrier (556) the forward movement of the product rotates the unbiased barrier (556) from the folded position to the upright position, and the unbiased barrier (556) is configured to cease the forward movement of the product when the unbiased barrier (556) is in the upright position; anda rotational mounting structure (563), the unbiased barrier (556) connected to the rotational mounting structure (563), and wherein the rotational mounting structure (563) is removably connected to the forward end of the divider (550).
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, further comprising:a second divider (550b) configured to be secured to the support structure, the second divider (550b) includes a second divider wall (552) and a second divider floor (554), the second divider wall (552) extending upwardly from the second divider floor (554), the second divider floor (554) includes a second top surface;the second divider (550b) oriented such that the second divider wall (554) opposes the divider wall (554) of the divider (550) to define a product pocket (573) therebetween in which a product fits; and the second divider (550b) further configured such that a product positioned on the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) of the divider (550) is also positioned on the second top surface (554a) of the second divider floor (554) of the second divider (550b).
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, wherein the unbiased barrier (556) includes a barrier handle (567) and is manually rotatable between the upright position and the folded position by pulling or pushing the barrier handle (567).
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, wherein the unbiased barrier (556) defines a folded angle (C) in between a rear surface (569) of the unbiased barrier (556) and the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) when the unbiased barrier (556) is in the folded position, wherein the folded angle (C) is between about 45 degrees to about 20 degrees.
- The merchandise display system of claim 3, wherein a top edge (568) of the rear surface (569) of the unbiased barrier (556) is rounded off.
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, wherein the rotational mounting structure (563) includes a mount slot (598) defined in the rotational mounting structure (563) and wherein the mount slot (598) is configured to mate with a front ridge (599) of the divider (550) to removably connect the rotational mounting structure (563) to the forward end (553) of the divider (550), and wherein the rotational mounting structure (563) includes a vertical stanchion (591) and a horizontal cross beam (593), wherein the horizontal cross beam (593) is connected to and extends from the vertical stanchion (591) in a lateral direction, and wherein at least a portion of the mount slot (598) is defined within the vertical stanchion (591).
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, wherein the rotational mounting structure (563) includes a first knuckle component (601) and the unbiased barrier (556) includes a second knuckle component (602), wherein a pin (566) extends through the first knuckle component (601) and the second knuckle component (602) to form a hinge for rotational attachment of the unbiased barrier (556) to the rotational mounting structure (563), wherein the rotational mounting structure (563) includes a rotational stop structure configured to engage the unbiased barrier (556) and stop rotation of the unbiased barrier (556) toward the folded position when the unbiased barrier (556) reaches the folded angle (C).
- The merchandise display system of claim 7, wherein the rotational mounting structure (593) is one of a hinge or flexible resilient member, wherein the rotational stop structure is a protrusion positioned proximate a lower portion of the rear surface (569) of the unbiased barrier (556) such that the lower portion of the rear surface (569) of the unbiased barrier (556) contacts the rotational stop structure when the unbiased barrier (556) reaches the folded angle (C) in the folded position.
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, wherein the divider (550) includes a pusher mechanism (520) configured to slide along the divider floor (554) to move product toward the forward end (553).
- The merchandise display system of claim 1, wherein the divider wall (552) separates the divider floor (554) into a first side portion (559) and a second side portion (551), with one on each side of the divider wall (552), the first side portion (559) having a right side portion of the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) and the second side portion (551) including a left side portion of the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554);
further comprising a second barrier (556) that is moveable by rotation between a folded position and an upright position, the second barrier (556) positioned proximate the forward end (553) of the divider (550) such that a second product positioned on the left side portion of the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) contacts the second barrier (556) when the second product moves toward the forward end (553) of the divider (550);
wherein the second barrier (556) is configured to rotate from the folded position to the upright position, wherein when a second product positioned on the left side portion of the top surface (554a) of the divider floor (554) moves toward the forward end (553) of the divider (550) and contacts the second barrier (556) the forward movement of the second product rotates the second barrier (556) from the folded position to the upright position, and the second barrier (556) is configured to cease the forward movement of the second product when the second barrier (556) is in the upright position;
the second barrier (556) connected to the rotational mounting structure (563). - The merchandise display system of claim 10, the rotational mounting structure (563) comprising a first rotational mount (597a) to which the barrier (556) is connected, a second rotational mount (597b) to which the second barrier (556) is connected, and a horizontal cross beam (593);
wherein the horizontal cross beam (593) extends in a lateral direction and wherein the first rotational mount (597a) is connected to a first section of the horizontal cross beam (593) and the second rotational mount (597b) is connected to a second section of the horizontal cross beam (593); and
wherein the rotational mounting structure (563) includes a mount slot (598) defined in the rotational mounting structure (563), the mount slot (598) is configured to mate with a front ridge (599) of the divider (550) to removably connect the rotational mounting structure (563) to the forward end (553) of the divider (550). - The merchandise display system of claim 11, wherein the first and second rotational mounts (597a, 597b) are removably connected to the forward end (553) of the divider (550).
- The merchandise system of claim 1, wherein the unbiased barrier (556) includes a resilient tab (606) configured to engage a tab recess (604a) when the unbiased barrier (556) reaches the upright position.
- The merchandise system of claim 13, wherein the tab recess (604a) is defined in the rotational mounting structure (563).
- The merchandise system of claim 1, wherein the support structure comprises a front rail (580).
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201361861843P | 2013-08-02 | 2013-08-02 | |
US14/136,029 US9138075B2 (en) | 2005-09-12 | 2013-12-20 | Product management display system |
PCT/US2014/049458 WO2015017811A2 (en) | 2013-08-02 | 2014-08-01 | Product management display system |
EP14761716.1A EP3027086B1 (en) | 2013-08-02 | 2014-08-01 | Product management display system |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP14761716.1A Division EP3027086B1 (en) | 2013-08-02 | 2014-08-01 | Product management display system |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP3505015A1 true EP3505015A1 (en) | 2019-07-03 |
EP3505015B1 EP3505015B1 (en) | 2024-04-17 |
Family
ID=51494485
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP14761716.1A Active EP3027086B1 (en) | 2013-08-02 | 2014-08-01 | Product management display system |
EP19155382.5A Active EP3505015B1 (en) | 2013-08-02 | 2014-08-01 | Product management display system |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP14761716.1A Active EP3027086B1 (en) | 2013-08-02 | 2014-08-01 | Product management display system |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (2) | EP3027086B1 (en) |
KR (1) | KR101792798B1 (en) |
CN (2) | CN106163342B (en) |
AU (1) | AU2014296021B2 (en) |
BR (2) | BR122020009177B1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2015017811A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US10448756B2 (en) * | 2017-06-16 | 2019-10-22 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
US10034557B1 (en) * | 2017-12-01 | 2018-07-31 | Southern Imperial Llc | Retail merchandise tray |
WO2019204686A1 (en) | 2018-04-19 | 2019-10-24 | The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York | Solderless circuit connector |
GB2576531B (en) | 2018-08-22 | 2020-08-19 | The Marmon Group Ltd | Merchandise display system and display unit |
CN109124100B (en) * | 2018-10-17 | 2023-10-20 | 许世晨 | Plug-in type multidimensional adjustable corrosion-resistant article-placing bracket |
CN109533930A (en) * | 2018-11-28 | 2019-03-29 | 浩塑展示设备(安徽)有限公司 | One kind can position formula cargo propeller and application method |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4351439A (en) * | 1980-03-11 | 1982-09-28 | Leggett & Platt, Incorporated | Merchandise display device |
US6142317A (en) * | 1997-11-12 | 2000-11-07 | Merl; Milton J. | Gravity feed shelving system with track and pusher |
US7918353B1 (en) * | 2007-02-20 | 2011-04-05 | Henschel-Steinau, Inc. | Display and dispensing apparatus |
US8056734B2 (en) | 2006-10-23 | 2011-11-15 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Merchandising system with flippable column and/or item stop |
Family Cites Families (23)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN2044823U (en) * | 1988-04-07 | 1989-09-27 | 杨荣杰 | Combined rack |
US5469976A (en) * | 1993-04-30 | 1995-11-28 | Burchell; James R. | Shelf allocation and management system |
NL9301794A (en) * | 1993-10-15 | 1995-05-01 | Sara Lee De Nv | Tray for goods in a shop, in particular a self-service shop, and method for filling this tray |
EP1021113A4 (en) * | 1997-10-10 | 2000-12-13 | L & P Property Management Co | Shelf assembly |
US6364265B1 (en) * | 1999-06-07 | 2002-04-02 | Accuride International, Inc. | Extendable swivel mounting bracket |
FR2801772B1 (en) * | 1999-12-02 | 2002-02-08 | Plasti Rapid Soc | DEVICE FOR PRESENTING PRODUCTS FOR SALE |
SE517206C2 (en) * | 2000-07-07 | 2002-05-07 | Hl Display Ab | Device at a product support |
FR2838035B1 (en) * | 2002-04-05 | 2006-11-03 | Binsse Marie Laure Traux | PRODUCT SUPPORT SHELF, AND FURNITURE HAVING THE SAME |
US20050072747A1 (en) * | 2002-05-10 | 2005-04-07 | Roslof James P. | Merchandising system |
US7168579B2 (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2007-01-30 | Dci Marketing, Inc. | Merchandising system |
JP4314428B2 (en) * | 2003-04-24 | 2009-08-19 | 日研工業株式会社 | Inclined display stand |
US8739984B2 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2014-06-03 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
CN101472509B (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2011-06-15 | Rtc工业股份有限公司 | Product management display system with trackless pusher mechanism |
DE102006010377A1 (en) * | 2006-03-03 | 2007-09-06 | Bos Gmbh & Co. Kg | Holding device for load |
US7424957B1 (en) * | 2006-05-24 | 2008-09-16 | Henschel-Steinau, Inc. | Front-loading display and dispensing apparatus |
CN200959933Y (en) * | 2006-10-12 | 2007-10-17 | 郭应超 | Multifunctional folding table |
CN201064981Y (en) * | 2007-08-15 | 2008-05-28 | 宋梅 | Foldable reading clamp |
TW200911176A (en) * | 2007-09-06 | 2009-03-16 | Par King Ind Co Ltd | Display apparatus |
US7690519B2 (en) * | 2008-03-10 | 2010-04-06 | Display Specialties, Inc. | Extendable product shelving |
KR100993863B1 (en) * | 2008-05-26 | 2010-11-11 | 오정곤 | Fold-up Armrest for toilet bowl and the toilet bowl equipped it |
US8210367B2 (en) * | 2009-01-15 | 2012-07-03 | Trion Industries, Inc. | Width-adjustable product display tray with novel mounting arrangement |
RU2525815C2 (en) * | 2009-08-14 | 2014-08-20 | Пос Тунинг Удо Фоссгенрих Гмбх Унд Ко.Кг | Goods feeding device |
FR2952286B1 (en) * | 2009-11-06 | 2013-07-26 | Cpi France | PORTILLON FOR PRODUCT DISPLAY, CORRESPONDING DISPLAY AND LOADING METHOD, DEDICATED LOADER |
-
2014
- 2014-08-01 WO PCT/US2014/049458 patent/WO2015017811A2/en active Application Filing
- 2014-08-01 BR BR122020009177-0A patent/BR122020009177B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2014-08-01 AU AU2014296021A patent/AU2014296021B2/en active Active
- 2014-08-01 EP EP14761716.1A patent/EP3027086B1/en active Active
- 2014-08-01 CN CN201480053814.XA patent/CN106163342B/en active Active
- 2014-08-01 CN CN202010805124.2A patent/CN111990841A/en active Pending
- 2014-08-01 EP EP19155382.5A patent/EP3505015B1/en active Active
- 2014-08-01 KR KR1020167005337A patent/KR101792798B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2014-08-01 BR BR112016002250-5A patent/BR112016002250B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4351439A (en) * | 1980-03-11 | 1982-09-28 | Leggett & Platt, Incorporated | Merchandise display device |
US6142317A (en) * | 1997-11-12 | 2000-11-07 | Merl; Milton J. | Gravity feed shelving system with track and pusher |
US8056734B2 (en) | 2006-10-23 | 2011-11-15 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Merchandising system with flippable column and/or item stop |
US7918353B1 (en) * | 2007-02-20 | 2011-04-05 | Henschel-Steinau, Inc. | Display and dispensing apparatus |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP3505015B1 (en) | 2024-04-17 |
AU2014296021A1 (en) | 2016-03-03 |
KR101792798B1 (en) | 2017-11-01 |
WO2015017811A2 (en) | 2015-02-05 |
WO2015017811A3 (en) | 2016-09-29 |
EP3027086A2 (en) | 2016-06-08 |
BR112016002250A2 (en) | 2017-08-01 |
CN111990841A (en) | 2020-11-27 |
BR122020009177B1 (en) | 2022-01-04 |
CN106163342B (en) | 2020-09-04 |
CN106163342A (en) | 2016-11-23 |
AU2014296021B2 (en) | 2017-02-09 |
KR20160038026A (en) | 2016-04-06 |
EP3027086B1 (en) | 2019-03-06 |
BR112016002250B1 (en) | 2022-06-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10905258B2 (en) | Product management display system | |
US20210378420A1 (en) | Product Management Display System | |
US9486088B2 (en) | Product management display system | |
US9750354B2 (en) | Product management display system | |
EP3505015B1 (en) | Product management display system | |
US11344138B2 (en) | Product management display system | |
EP3324794B1 (en) | Product management display system | |
EP3518709B1 (en) | Product management display system | |
EP3087875B1 (en) | Product management display system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN PUBLISHED |
|
AC | Divisional application: reference to earlier application |
Ref document number: 3027086 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20191231 |
|
RBV | Designated contracting states (corrected) |
Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
17Q | First examination report despatched |
Effective date: 20210222 |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20231115 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED |
|
AC | Divisional application: reference to earlier application |
Ref document number: 3027086 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: EP |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 602014089997 Country of ref document: DE |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: LT Ref legal event code: MG9D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: NL Ref legal event code: MP Effective date: 20240417 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: AT Ref legal event code: MK05 Ref document number: 1676351 Country of ref document: AT Kind code of ref document: T Effective date: 20240417 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: NL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240417 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: NL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240417 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240817 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: BG Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240417 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: HR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240417 Ref country code: FI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240417 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240718 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: PT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20240819 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GB Payment date: 20240924 Year of fee payment: 11 |